biblatex-gb7714-2015 (30mar19)

git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@50661 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751

11 files changed, 5081 insertions, 231 deletions

diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/chinese-erj.bbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/chinese-erj.bbx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7a0646b5627
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/chinese-erj.bbx
@@ -0,0 +1,237 @@
+%%
+%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
+%% erj.bbx --- A bibliography style of Economic Research Journal in china
+%% modified from gb7714-2015ay at the request of ddswhu
+%% Maintained by huzhenzhen
+%% E-mail: hzzmail@163.com
+%% Released under the LaTeX Project Public License v1.3c or later
+%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%%用法：类似于标准的样式在biblatex加载时设置样式
+%%文献表正常处理，标注命令主要用cite和textcite
+\ProvidesFile{chinese-erj.bbx}[2019/03/28 v1.0 a biblatex bibliography style for ERJ]
+
+
+%==================================================
+%加载gb样式
+%==================================================
+\RequireBibliographyStyle{gb7714-2015ay}
+\RequirePackage{mfirstuc}%单词首字母大写的问题
+\MFUnocap{in}%
+\MFUnocap{the}%
+\MFUnocap{of}%
+\MFUnocap{on}%
+\MFUnocap{and}%
+\MFUnocap{for}%
+
+
+%==================================================
+%考虑多音字增加multipinyin排序，是其可以根据key域添加拼音来排序
+%==================================================
+\DeclareSortingTemplate{multipinyin}{
+      \sort{
+        \field{presort}
+      }
+      \sort{
+    	\field{lansortorder}%language
+      }
+      \sort{
+        \field{sortkey}
+      }
+      \sort{%[direction=descending]
+        \field{sortname}
+        \field{author}
+        \field{editor}
+        \field{translator}
+      }
+      \sort{
+        \field{sortyear}
+        \field{year}
+      }
+      \sort{
+        \field{sorttitle}
+        \field{title}
+      }
+      \sort{
+        \field{volume}
+        \literal{0}
+      }
+    }
+
+%==================================================
+%选项设置
+%==================================================
+    \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
+    maxbibnames=99,
+    gbtype=false,
+    gbpub=false,
+    gbnamefmt=reverseorder,
+    sorting=multipinyin,
+    doi=false,
+    url=false,
+    }
+
+%==================================================
+%为标注和文献表中标点格式，重设and本地化字符串
+%==================================================
+\DefineBibliographyStrings{english}{
+    and         = { and },
+    andcn       = {、},
+    andincitecn = {和},%将标注中的分开，便于与文献表中的区分
+    andincite   = {\&},
+    %andotherscn={等},
+    %mathesiscn={[硕士学位论文]},
+    %phdthesiscn={[博士学位论文]},
+}
+
+
+%==================================================
+%设置一些标点格式为中文的标点
+%==================================================
+\DeclareFieldFormat{titlecase}{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{#1}{\capitalisewords{#1}}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat*{title}{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{《#1》}{#1\isdot}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[article]{title}{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{《#1》}{\mkbibquote{#1}\isdot}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat*{journaltitle}{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{《#1》}{\textit{#1}}}%
+%\DeclareFieldFormat*{booktitle}{《#1》}
+\renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{，}%%来源biblatex.def
+\DeclareDelimFormat*{multinamedelim}{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{、}{，}}%\addcomma\addspace
+\DeclareDelimFormat{finalnamedelim}{%
+  %\ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{2}{\finalandcomma}{}%
+  %\addspace%
+  \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
+  \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}%
+  \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
+  \ifcurrentname{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}%
+  \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
+  \ifcase\value{gbcitelocalcase}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andincitecn}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andkr}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andjp}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\space\bibstring{andincite}\space}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
+%\space%
+  \or%
+  \bibstring{andincitecn}\space%
+  \or%
+  \bibstring{andincite}\space%
+  \fi}
+\DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{finalnamedelim}{%
+%  \ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{2}{\finalandcomma}{}%
+%  \addspace%
+  \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
+  \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}%
+  \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
+  \ifcurrentname{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}%
+  \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
+  \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andcn}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andkr}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andjp}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
+\space%
+  \or%
+  \bibstring{andcn}\space%
+  \or%
+  \bibstring{and}\space%
+  \fi}
+\DeclareDelimFormat{nameyeardelim}{，}%\addcomma\addspace
+\DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{nameyeardelim}{，}%\addcomma\addspace
+\DeclareDelimFormat{bibpagespunct}{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{}{，}}%\addcomma\addspace
+\renewcommand*{\newunitpunct}{，}%\addcomma\space %，
+\renewcommand*{\finentrypunct}{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{。}{\adddot}}
+
+%==================================================
+%调整部分域的输出格式
+%==================================================
+%
+%   修改number和volume的格式
+%
+\newcounter{numberwithoutzero}
+\DeclareFieldFormat[article,periodical]{number}%
+    {\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{%
+        \iffieldint{number}{\setcounter{numberwithoutzero}{#1}\printtext{\bibstring{serialcn}\addthinspace\arabic{numberwithoutzero}\addthinspace 期}}
+        {\printtext{\bibstring{serialcn}\addthinspace#1\addthinspace 期}}%
+    }%
+        {\printtext{(}#1\printtext{)}}}% %
+\DeclareFieldFormat[article,periodical]{volume}%
+    {\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{}%
+    {#1}}% volume of a book
+
+%
+%   调整期刊名的格式
+%
+%   原理方法:因为作者年制年份提到前面，因此涉及到期刊名与后面的卷期的关系。
+%   v1.0k,20180425,增加了字体控制命令，hzz
+\renewbibmacro*{journal+issuetitle}{\bibpubfont%源来自standard.bbx
+  \usebibmacro{journal}%
+  %\setunit*{\addspace}%
+  %\setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}%修改为增加一个逗号
+  \iffieldundef{series}%
+    {}%
+    {\newunit%
+     \printfield{series}%
+     \setunit{\addspace}}%
+  %\usebibmacro{volume+number+eid}%
+  %\setunit{\addspace}%
+  \usebibmacro{issue+date}%
+  %\setunit{\addcolon\space}%
+  %\iffieldundef{volume}{}{\setunit{\addcomma\space}}%
+  %换成逗号和空格
+  \usebibmacro{issue}%
+  \usebibmacro{volume+number+eid}%把卷期放到年份后面
+  %\newunit
+  }
+
+%   调整期刊卷和期的格式
+%
+\renewbibmacro*{volume+number+eid}{%源来自standard.bbx
+\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{%\printfield{volume}%
+  \iffieldundef{number}{}{\printfield{number}}%区别于顺序编码制
+    }
+  {\newunit\printfield{volume}%
+  %\setunit*{\adddot\space}%
+  \printfield{number}%
+  \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+  \printfield{eid}}}
+
+%
+%   重设title的输出
+%
+%   20180425，v1.0k，为标题增加字体控制命令，Hu Zhenzhen
+%   原理方法:将文献类型标识符输出出去，原输出来自biblatex.def文件
+%   利用toggle做标识符是否输出的判断
+\renewbibmacro*{title}{%
+  \ifboolexpr{%
+    test{\iffieldundef{title}}%
+    and
+    test{\iffieldundef{subtitle}}%
+  }%
+    {}%
+    {\setunit{：}\printtext[title]{\bibtitlefont%增加字体控制命令%增加了标点：
+       \printfield[titlecase]{title}%
+       \ifboolexpr{test {\iffieldundef{subtitle}}}%这里增加了对子标题的判断，解决不判断多一个点的问题
+       {}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
+       \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}%
+       \iffieldundef{titleaddon}{}%判断一下titleaddon，否则直接加可能多一个空格
+        {\setunit{\subtitlepunct}\printfield{titleaddon}}%
+        \iftoggle{bbx:gbtype}{%
+         \iffieldundef{note}{\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}%在标题后直接给出文献标识字母，判断一下，是否是报纸和标准
+        {\iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{\printfield[gbtypeflags]{usera}}%判断是否为标准
+                                         {\iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{\printfield[gbtypeflagn]{usera}}% 判断是否为报纸
+                                                                      {\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}}% 其它
+        }}{}%
+     %\iffieldundef{booktitle}{\newunit}{}%当title是析出时，不要标点
+     %\newunit
+     }%
+}}
+
+\DeclareFieldFormat{pages}{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{}{#1}}%页码引用格式的修改%去掉前面引导页码的pp.等字符
+
+\setlength{\bibitemindent}{1.5\ccwd} % bibitemindent表示一条文献中第一行相对后面各行的缩进
+\setlength{\bibhang}{0pt} % 作者年制中 bibhang 表示的各行起始位置到页
+                          % 边的距离,顺序编码制中
+                          % bibhang+labelnumberwidth 表示各行起始位置
+                          % 到页边的距离
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/chinese-erj.cbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/chinese-erj.cbx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7fd829a0eed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/chinese-erj.cbx
@@ -0,0 +1,151 @@
+%%
+%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
+%% erj.cbx --- A citation style of Economic Research Journal in china
+%% modified from gb7714-2015ay for the request by ddswhu
+%% Maintained by huzhenzhen
+%% E-mail: hzzmail@163.com
+%% Released under the LaTeX Project Public License v1.3c or later
+%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%%用法：类似于标准的样式在biblatex加载时设置样式
+%%文献表正常处理，标注命令主要用cite和textcite
+
+\ProvidesFile{chinese-erj.cbx}[2019/03/28 v1.0 a biblatex citation style for ERJ]
+
+%==================================================
+%加载gb样式
+%==================================================
+\RequireCitationStyle{gb7714-2015ay} %
+
+
+
+%==================================================
+%选项设置
+%==================================================
+\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
+    maxcitenames=2,
+    mincitenames=1,
+}
+
+%==================================================
+%引用命令设置，主要用cite和textcite
+%包括标点设置
+%==================================================
+\renewcommand*{\multicitedelim}{；}%\addsemicolon\addspace；
+\renewcommand*{\textcitedelim}{%
+  \iffinalcitedelim
+    {\ifnumgreater{\value{textcitetotal}}{2}
+       {}{}%\iftextcitepunct{\finalandsemicolon}{\finalandcomma}
+     \addspace 、}%\addspace\bibstring{andincitecn}
+    {\iftextcitepunct{\addsemicolon\space}{\addspace 、}}%\addcomma
+}%\space
+
+\DeclareDelimFormat[textcite]{nameyeardelim}{\addspace}%\addcomma\space
+\DeclareDelimFormat[textcite]{andothersdelim}{\iffieldequalstr{userf}{chinese}{}{\addspace}}%
+
+%之所以不用\DeclareDelimFormat{andothersdelim}{}这样的设置是因为gb7714-2015中为兼容老版本的biblatex做的处理就是这样的
+%所以用相同的方式
+\AtEveryCitekey{%
+\iffieldequalstr{userf}{chinese}{\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{}}%\addthinspace
+  {\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addspace}}%
+}
+
+%标注压缩时，直接用date+extradate代替extradate实现2006a，2006b的效果
+%\DeclareDelimFormat*{compcitedelim}{、}%\addcomma\addspace
+\newbibmacro*{cite:extradate}{%
+  \iffieldundef{extradate}
+    {}
+    {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\addspace\printlabeldateextra}}}%\printfield{extradate}\printlabeldateextra \printfield{labelyear}\printfield{extradate}
+
+%\AtEveryCite{%
+%\let\parentext=\parentexttrack%
+%\let\bibopenparen=（%
+%\let\bibcloseparen=）}
+
+%添加前后空格
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}%[\mkbibparens]
+  {\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
+   \printtext{（}\usebibmacro{prenote}}%)\addspace
+  {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+   \usebibmacro{cite}}
+  {}
+  {\usebibmacro{postnote}%(
+  ）}%\addspace
+
+%原版
+%\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkbibparens]
+%  {\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
+%   \usebibmacro{prenote}}%)
+%  {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+%   \usebibmacro{cite}}
+%  {}
+%  {\usebibmacro{postnote}}
+
+%
+%添加后面空格
+%\DeclareCiteCommand{\cbx@textcite}
+%  {\usebibmacro{cite:init}}
+%  {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+%   \usebibmacro{textcite}}
+%  {}
+%  {\usebibmacro{textcite:postnote}\addspace}
+
+\newbibmacro*{textcite}{%
+  \iffieldequals{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}
+    {\iffieldundef{shorthand}
+       {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}\AND
+                    \(\value{multicitecount}=0\OR\iffieldundef{postnote}\)}
+          {\setunit{\addcomma}%
+           \usebibmacro{cite:extradate}}
+          {\setunit{\compcitedelim}%
+           \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}%
+           \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}}
+       {\setunit{\compcitedelim}%
+        \usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}%
+        \global\undef\cbx@lastyear}}
+    {\ifnameundef{labelname}
+       {\iffieldundef{shorthand}
+          {\usebibmacro{cite:label}%
+           \setunit{%
+             \global\booltrue{cbx:parens}%
+             \printdelim{nonameyeardelim}（}%\bibopenparen
+           \ifnumequal{\value{citecount}}{1}
+             {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+             {}%
+           \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}}
+          {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}
+       {\printnames{labelname}%
+        \setunit{%
+          \global\booltrue{cbx:parens}%
+          \printdelim{nameyeardelim}（}%\bibopenparen
+        \ifnumequal{\value{citecount}}{1}
+          {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+          {}%
+        \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+          {\iffieldundef{labelyear}
+             {\usebibmacro{cite:label}}
+             {\usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}}%
+           \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}
+          {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}%
+           \global\undef\cbx@lastyear}}%
+     \stepcounter{textcitecount}%
+     \savefield{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}}%
+  \setunit{%
+    \ifbool{cbx:parens}
+      {）\global\boolfalse{cbx:parens}}%\bibcloseparen
+      {}%
+    \textcitedelim}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{textcite:postnote}{%
+  \usebibmacro{postnote}%
+  \ifthenelse{\value{multicitecount}=\value{multicitetotal}}
+    {\setunit{}%
+     \printtext{%
+       \ifbool{cbx:parens}
+         {）\global\boolfalse{cbx:parens}}%\bibcloseparen
+         {}}}
+    {\setunit{%
+       \ifbool{cbx:parens}
+         {）\global\boolfalse{cbx:parens}}%\bibcloseparen
+         {}%
+       \textcitedelim}}}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015-gbk.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015-gbk.def
index 17afbf67cee..50b9a5c39c6 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015-gbk.def
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015-gbk.def
@@ -21,3 +21,7 @@
     \def\str@numbercn{��}
     \def\str@serialcn{��}
     \def\str@sameentry{ͬ}
+    \def\str@incn{��}
+    \def\str@mathesiscn{˶ʿѧλ����}
+    \def\str@phdthesiscn{��ʿѧλ����}
+    \def\str@editorcn{����}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015.bbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015.bbx
index cc8c75d3e7e..6429952be64 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015.bbx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015.bbx
@@ -11,10 +11,10 @@
 %
 %   版本和时间信息
 %
-\def\versionofgbtstyle{2019/02/11 v1.0q}
+\def\versionofgbtstyle{2019/03/28 v1.0r}
 \def\versionofbiblatex{\abx@version}
 \ProvidesFile{gb7714-2015.bbx}[\versionofgbtstyle biblatex bibliography style]
-\RequireBiber[3]%显式指定用biber后端
+%\RequireBiber[3]%显式指定用biber后端，当用bibtex时会报错，但其实不会影响编译，只是采用bibtex后无法达成格式需求
 
 %=====================================================================
 %   加载标准样式
@@ -193,9 +193,11 @@
     %为与lee zeping的bst的样式统一，使用mark和medium这两域名
     %为单个条目的姓名格式控制增加nameformat和namefmtid两个域
     %为缩略信息文献表增加了shortbooktitle域
+    %为多语言排序增加了lansortorder域
     \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{mark,medium,nameformat}
     \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=integer]{namefmtid}
     \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{shortbooktitle}
+    \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{lansortorder}
 
 
 
@@ -203,6 +205,14 @@
 %   设置宏包选项
 %=====================================================================
     %
+    %   增加一个控制是否输出type域的选项
+    %   20190212,v1,0q,hzz
+    \newtoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype}
+    \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfieldtype}[false]{%biblatex低版本
+      \settoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype}{#1}}
+    \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfieldtype}
+
+    %
     %   增加一个选项，用于控制是否实现GB/T 7714-2015标准的脚注文献表
     %   20190203，v1.0p，hzz
     %   原理方法:默认做patch，文献引用带圈上标数字表示，脚注中的文献用带圈非上标数字做标签
@@ -213,6 +223,10 @@
     \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfootbib}
 
     %%
+    \newlength{\footbibmargin}
+    \newlength{\footbiblabelsep}
+    \setlength{\footbibmargin}{1em}%脚注的段落左侧缩进距离
+    \setlength{\footbiblabelsep}{0.5em}%脚注中标记号与脚注段落的间距
     \def\execgbfootbib%
     {%
     %开启引用跟踪计数器，为使用\ifciteseen等测试命令
@@ -224,8 +238,80 @@
     %beamer类因为其特殊性，为避免冲突不调footmisc。
     %同时footmisc与hyperref宏包也不兼容，所以使用footmisc时会破坏脚注的超链接
     %如果要实现超链接可以将下句注释掉，这里留着主要是实现悬挂对齐。
-    \PassOptionsToPackage{perpage,hang}{footmisc}
-    \RequirePackage{footmisc}}
+    %\PassOptionsToPackage{perpage,hang}{footmisc}%
+    %\RequirePackage{footmisc}%
+
+    %重新实现脚注的根据单页重设脚注号码
+    %重新实现脚注的悬挂对齐问题，不再使用footmisc，直接从latex核心代码和hyperref代码进行修改
+    %v1.0q 20190317 hzz
+    \@addtoreset{footnote}{page}%重设计数器
+
+\@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{%加载hyperref则对\H@@footnotetext做重定义
+    \long\def\H@@footnotetext##1{\insert\footins{%
+    \reset@font\footnotesize
+    \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+    \splittopskip\footnotesep
+    \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM
+    \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
+    \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+       \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark
+    }%
+    \color@begingroup
+    \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进
+      \@makefntext{%
+        \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox%
+        }%
+    \color@endgroup}}%
+
+  \long\def\H@@mpfootnotetext##1{%
+  \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
+    \unvbox\@mpfootins
+    \reset@font\footnotesize
+    \hsize\columnwidth
+    \@parboxrestore
+    \protected@edef\@currentlabel
+         {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
+    \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进
+    \color@begingroup
+      \@makefntext{%
+        \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
+    \color@endgroup}}
+    }{%否则对latex核心代码中的\@footnotetext做重定义
+    \long\def\@footnotetext##1{\insert\footins{%
+    \reset@font\footnotesize
+    \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+    \splittopskip\footnotesep
+    \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM
+    \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
+    \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+       \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark
+    }%
+    \color@begingroup
+    \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进
+      \@makefntext{%
+        \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox%
+        }%
+    \color@endgroup}}%
+
+    \long\def\@mpfootnotetext##1{%
+    \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
+    \unvbox\@mpfootins
+    \reset@font\footnotesize
+    \hsize\columnwidth
+    \@parboxrestore
+    \protected@edef\@currentlabel
+         {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
+    \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进
+    \color@begingroup
+      \@makefntext{%
+        \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
+    \color@endgroup}}
+    }
+
+    \long\def\@makefntext##1{%增加了脚注标记与正文的间隔
+    \parindent 1em\noindent \hb@xt@ 0em{\hss \@makefnmark\makebox[\footbiblabelsep]{}}##1}
+
+    }
 
     %
     %使脚注标记加圈并设置数字的字体为tiny，不使用修改thefootnote的方式
@@ -241,6 +327,7 @@
     %
     %判断当前文献是否已经引用过且是做的footfullcite(即已经作为脚注输出文献内容)
     %记录首次输出时的脚注号码，用于后面再次引用该文献时的输出，比如同(4)。
+    %v1.0q 20190309 区分使脚注标注适应minipage中的情况
     \newbibmacro*{citesavefn}{%
         \ifciteseen%当被引用过为true
         {\ifcsdef{sec\arabic{refsection}et\thefield{entrykey}}%当已经定义过脚注序号信息
@@ -248,9 +335,14 @@
     \str@sameentry\gdef\@thefnmark{\csuse{sec\arabic{refsection}et\thefield{entrykey}}}%
     \@makefnmark%
             }}%
-            {\csxdef{sec\arabic{refsection}et\thefield{entrykey}}{\arabic{footnote}}}%
+            {\csxdef{sec\arabic{refsection}et\thefield{entrykey}}{%
+            \ifcsstring{@mpfn}{mpfootnote}{\@alph\c@mpfootnote}{\thefootnote}%
+            }}%
         }%
-        {\csxdef{sec\arabic{refsection}et\thefield{entrykey}}{\arabic{footnote}}}%
+        {\csxdef{sec\arabic{refsection}et\thefield{entrykey}}{%
+        \ifcsstring{@mpfn}{mpfootnote}{\@alph\c@mpfootnote}{\thefootnote}%
+        %判断在minipage中比较麻烦，这里使用\@mpfn的定义进行判断
+        }}%
     }
 
     %
@@ -323,6 +415,10 @@
     \def\str@numbercn{册}
     \def\str@serialcn{第}
     \def\str@sameentry{同}
+    \def\str@incn{见}
+    \def\str@mathesiscn{硕士学位论文}
+    \def\str@phdthesiscn{博士学位论文}
+    \def\str@editorcn{主编}
 
     \AtEndOfPackage{%
 	\iftoggle{bbx:codegbk}{%
@@ -474,6 +570,12 @@
 
 \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2016/03/27}
   { % 针对biblatex>=3.3版本的选项设置
+    %   增加不同语言排序的切换选项
+    %   numeric样式，不使用该选项，这里给出仅为兼容性考虑
+    %   v1.0q，20190307，hzz
+    %
+    \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gblanorder}[chineseahead]{}
+
     %
     %   增加本地化字符串的中英文切换选项
     %   gbcitelocal指标注中的本地化字符串
@@ -519,6 +621,7 @@
         \ifstrequal{#1}{givenahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{2}}{}%given-family
         \ifstrequal{#1}{familyahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{3}}{}
         \ifstrequal{#1}{pinyin}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{4}}{}%family-given
+        \ifstrequal{#1}{reverseorder}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{5}}{}%family-given/given-family
     }
     \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbnamefmt}
 
@@ -534,6 +637,12 @@
     }
   }
   {% 针对biblatex<3.3版本的选项设置
+    %   增加不同语言排序的切换选项
+    %   numeric样式，不使用该选项，这里给出仅为兼容性考虑
+    %   v1.0q，20190307，hzz
+    %
+    \DeclareBibliographyOption{gblanorder}[chineseahead]{}
+
     %
     %   增加序号标签格式处理选项
     %   v1.0l，20180623，hzz
@@ -552,6 +661,7 @@
         \ifstrequal{#1}{givenahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{2}}{}%given-family
         \ifstrequal{#1}{familyahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{3}}{}
         \ifstrequal{#1}{pinyin}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{4}}{}%family-given
+        \ifstrequal{#1}{reverseorder}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{5}}{}%family-given/given-family
     }
     \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbnamefmt}
 
@@ -639,6 +749,13 @@
     \NewBibliographyString{volumecn}
     \NewBibliographyString{numbercn}
     \NewBibliographyString{serialcn}
+    \NewBibliographyString{incn}
+    \NewBibliographyString{mathesiscn}
+    \NewBibliographyString{phdthesiscn}
+    \NewBibliographyString{editorcn}
+    \NewBibliographyString{editorscn}
+
+
 
     %
     %   修改一些当地化字符串
@@ -669,6 +786,11 @@
        andotherskr={외},
        andjp={和},
        andkr={和},
+       incn={\str@incn\addcolon\addspace},
+       mathesiscn={\str@mathesiscn},
+       phdthesiscn={\str@phdthesiscn},
+       editorscn={\str@editorcn},
+       editorcn={\str@editorcn},
 }
 
 
@@ -846,11 +968,6 @@
             \step[fieldsource=version] %有时会把version和edition混淆，处理后直接用edition
             \step[fieldset=edition, origfieldval]
             }
-        \map{
-            \pertype{inbook}
-            \step[fieldsource=editor]%有时会把editor和bookauthor混淆，处理后使用bookauthor
-            \step[fieldset=bookauthor, origfieldval]
-            }
         \map{%兼容老的standard类型，确定文献类型标识符
             \pertype{standard}
             \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={S}]
@@ -866,8 +983,6 @@
             \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={C}]
             \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher
             \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval]
-            \step[fieldsource=editor]%%有时会把editor和bookauthor混淆，处理后使用bookauthor
-            \step[fieldset=bookauthor, origfieldval]
             }
         \map{
             \pertype{proceedings}
@@ -880,8 +995,6 @@
             \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={G}]
             \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher
             \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval]
-            \step[fieldsource=editor]%%有时会把editor和bookauthor混淆，处理后使用bookauthor
-            \step[fieldset=bookauthor, origfieldval]
             }
         \map{
             \pertype{collection}
@@ -1081,27 +1194,27 @@
             \step[fieldset=userd,origfieldval]
             }
         \map{%当文献给出language域时，设置文献要使用的本地化字符串的语言
-            \step[fieldsource=language,match=english,final]
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(e|E)(n|N)(g|G)(l|L)(i|I)(s|S)(h|H)},final]
             \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}]
             }
         \map{
-            \step[fieldsource=language,match=russian,final]
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(r|R)(u|U)(s|S)(s|S)(i|I)(a|A)(n|N)},final]
             \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={russian}]
             }
         \map{%
-            \step[fieldsource=language,match=french,final]
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(f|F)(r|R)(e|E)(n|N)(c|C)(h|H)},final]
             \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={french}]
             }
         \map{%
-            \step[fieldsource=language,match=chinese,final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(c|C)(h|H)(i|I)(n|N)(e|E)(s|S)(e|E)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
             \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}]
             }
         \map{%
-            \step[fieldsource=language,match=japnese,final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(j|J)(a|A)(p|P)(a|A)(n|N)(e|E)(s|S)(e|E)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
             \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}]
             }
         \map{%
-            \step[fieldsource=language,match=korean,final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(k|K)(o|O)(r|R)(e|E)(a|A)(n|N)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
             \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}]
             }
 }
@@ -1124,14 +1237,14 @@
             \map{%剩下的全部映射为book
             \step[typesource=standard, typetarget=book, final]
             }
-            \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置
-            \step[typesource=mastersthesis, typetarget=thesis, final]
-            %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=mathesis]
-            }
-            \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置
-            \step[typesource=phdthesis, typetarget=thesis, final]
-            %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=phdthesis]
-            }
+%            \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置
+%            \step[typesource=mastersthesis, typetarget=thesis, final]
+%            %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=mathesis]
+%            }
+%            \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置
+%            \step[typesource=phdthesis, typetarget=thesis, final]
+%            %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=phdthesis]
+%            }
             \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置
             \step[typesource=techreport, typetarget=report, final]
             %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=techreport]
@@ -1282,14 +1395,14 @@
             \map{%剩下的全部映射为book
             \step[typesource=standard, typetarget=book, final]
             }
-            \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置
-            \step[typesource=mastersthesis, typetarget=thesis, final]
-            %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=mathesis]
-            }
-            \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置
-            \step[typesource=phdthesis, typetarget=thesis, final]
-            %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=phdthesis]
-            }
+%            \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置
+%            \step[typesource=mastersthesis, typetarget=thesis, final]
+%            %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=mathesis]
+%            }
+%            \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置
+%            \step[typesource=phdthesis, typetarget=thesis, final]
+%            %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=phdthesis]
+%            }
             \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置
             \step[typesource=techreport, typetarget=report, final]
             %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=techreport]
@@ -1554,28 +1667,40 @@
 %   而[]中间的内容，从4.6.2节的例子看也是可以分割的，因此内部的nobreak也可以去掉
 %
 \DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflag}{%
-\iftoggle{bbx:url}{\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
-{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}}%
-{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}}%
-}{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}}}
+\iftoggle{bbx:url}%
+    {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
+        {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}}%
+        {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}}%
+    }%
+    {\ifentrytype{online}%
+        {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}}%
+        {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}}%
+    }%
+}
 
 %
 %   新增用于报纸的文献类型标识符的格式
 %
 \DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflagn}{%用于报纸newspaper
-\iftoggle{bbx:url}{\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
-{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
-{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}\nobreak}%
-}{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}}
+\iftoggle{bbx:url}%
+    {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
+        {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
+        {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}\nobreak}%
+    }%
+    {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
+}
 
 %
 %   新增用于标准的文献类型标识符的格式
 %
 \DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflags}{%用于标准standard
-\iftoggle{bbx:url}{\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
-{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
-{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}\nobreak}%
-}{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}}
+\iftoggle{bbx:url}%
+    {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
+        {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
+        {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}\nobreak}%
+    }%
+    {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
+}
 
 %
 %   重设title等参考文献信息的输出格式
@@ -1690,13 +1815,13 @@
     test \ifmorenames
   }{\ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{1}%
        {\finalandcomma}%
-       {}%biblatex作者要区别单作者加等的情况，这里为符合gbt7714-2015第7.2节的要求加上了逗号。
+       {}%
 \printdelim{andothersdelim}\printdelim{strandothersdelim}%
 }{%当是译者的时候需要特殊处理：从7.2节看等，译前面加逗号，但从示例看等和译同时出现时，译前的逗号没有，比如：
 %袁训来, 陈哲, 肖书海, 等.
 %胡泳, 范海燕, 译.
 %潘惠霞, 魏婧, 杨艳, 等译.
-\ifcurrentname{translator}{\addcomma}{}%
+\ifcurrentname{translator}{\addcomma\addthinspace}{}%为了实现上述第二个示例情况做的处理
 }}
 
 
@@ -1709,8 +1834,6 @@
 %   首先设置全局的，然后设置文献表中的，这一等价于将所有的cite命令环境都设置过了
 %   而不用对每一个引用命令单独设置，比如cite，parancite，textcite都设置
 \DeclareDelimFormat{strandothersdelim}{%
-  \ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{2}{\finalandcomma}{}%
-  \addspace%
   \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
   \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}%
   \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
@@ -1719,7 +1842,7 @@
   \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andotherscn}}{}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andotherskr}}{}%
-    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japnese}{\bibstring{andothersjp}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andothersjp}}{}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%
@@ -1748,7 +1871,7 @@
   \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andcn}}{}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andkr}}{}%
-    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japnese}{\bibstring{andjp}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andjp}}{}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
@@ -1853,6 +1976,36 @@
       {\namepartgiven}
       {\namepartprefix}
       {\namepartsuffix}%
+\or
+  \ifnumequal{\value{listcount}}{1}
+    {\ifgiveninits
+       {\usebibmacro{name:family-given}
+         {\namepartfamily}
+         {\namepartgiveni}
+         {\namepartprefix}
+         {\namepartsuffix}}
+       {\usebibmacro{name:family-given}
+         {\namepartfamily}
+         {\namepartgiven}
+         {\namepartprefix}
+         {\namepartsuffix}}%
+     \ifboolexpe{%
+       test {\ifdefvoid\namepartgiven}
+       and
+       test {\ifdefvoid\namepartprefix}}
+       {}
+       {\usebibmacro{name:revsdelim}}}
+    {\ifgiveninits
+       {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}
+         {\namepartfamily}
+         {\namepartgiveni}
+         {\namepartprefix}
+         {\namepartsuffix}}
+       {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}
+         {\namepartfamily}
+         {\namepartgiven}
+         {\namepartprefix}
+         {\namepartsuffix}}}%
 \fi
   \usebibmacro{name:andothers}}
 
@@ -2064,6 +2217,17 @@
        {\usebibmacro{name:first-last}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}%
     \or
     \usebibmacro{name:gbpinyin}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}%
+    \or
+      \ifnumequal{\value{listcount}}{1}
+    {\iffirstinits
+       {\usebibmacro{name:last-first}{#1}{#4}{#5}{#7}}
+       {\usebibmacro{name:last-first}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}%
+     \ifblank{#3#5}
+       {}
+       {\usebibmacro{name:revsdelim}}}
+    {\iffirstinits
+       {\usebibmacro{name:first-last}{#1}{#4}{#5}{#7}}
+       {\usebibmacro{name:first-last}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}}%
   \fi
   \usebibmacro{name:andothers}}
 }
@@ -2575,6 +2739,8 @@ incollection,proceedings,inproceedings]{number}{%
 
 %
 %   编者的符号修改一下
+%   v1.0 2016-07-01
+%   v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz 修改editortype前的标点
 %
 \renewbibmacro*{editor}{%源来自biblatex.DEF
   \ifboolexpr{
@@ -2585,13 +2751,16 @@ incollection,proceedings,inproceedings]{number}{%
     {\printnames{editor}%
     \iffieldundef{editortype}%增加一个类型判断，用于存在editortype的情况
     {\setunit\addspace}%当没有editortype时，直接用句点
-    {\setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+    {%\setunit{\addcomma\space}%
      \usebibmacro{editorstrg}}%
-     \clearname{editor}}
+     %\clearname{editor}
+     }%
     {}}
 
 %
 %   编者类型做一修改
+%   v1.0 2016-07-01
+%   v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz 修改editortype不同语言的不同本地化字符串
 %
 \renewbibmacro*{editorstrg}{%源来自biblatex.DEF
   \printtext[editortype]{%
@@ -2611,12 +2780,71 @@ incollection,proceedings,inproceedings]{number}{%
             or
             test {\ifandothers{editor}}
           }
-            {\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}
-            {\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}}
+            {\printdelim{streditortypes}}
+            {\printdelim{streditortype}}}
          {\thefield{editortype}}}%
          }}
 
 %
+%   编者类型的本地化字符串输出
+%   v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz
+%   能对不同条目类型作格式设置的域格式，能对不同环境做格式设置的分隔符
+%   能对不同文境作设置的包括排序，标签等
+%   这里因为考虑可能标注和文献表中存在不同，所以用分隔符来输出本地化字符串
+%
+\DeclareDelimFormat{streditortypes}{%
+  \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
+  \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
+  \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
+  \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}scn}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}skr}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}sjp}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}%
+  \or%
+  \bibstring{\thefield{editortype}scn}%
+  \or%
+  \addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}%
+  \fi}
+%
+\DeclareDelimFormat{streditortype}{%
+  \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
+  \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
+  \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
+  \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}cn}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}kr}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}jp}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}%
+  \or%
+  \bibstring{\thefield{editortype}cn}%
+  \or%
+  \addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}%
+  \fi}
+
+
+%
+%   bookauthor域的输出，
+%   v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz
+% 不再对editor和bookauthor做sourcemap，而是下面的宏内逻辑代替，
+% 使得除使用bookauthor外也可以使用editor，便于在使用editor时使用editortype
+\renewbibmacro*{bybookauthor}{%
+    \ifnameundef{bookauthor}%
+        {\ifnameundef{editor}%
+            {}%
+            {\ifnamesequal{author}{editor}%
+                {}{\usebibmacro{editor}}}%
+        }%
+        {\ifnamesequal{author}{bookauthor}%
+            {}{\printnames{bookauthor}}%
+        }%
+}
+
+%
 %   修改期刊的标题
 %
 \renewbibmacro*{periodical}{%源来自biblatex.DEF
@@ -2722,12 +2950,26 @@ incollection,proceedings,inproceedings]{number}{%
 %
 %   修改in:用于inbook、incollection、inproceedings等类型
 %   2018.04.20,v1.0k,renewed marco，by hzz
+%   20190212,v1.0q,增加中英文区分，by hzz
 %
 %   原理方法:使用bibmacro{in:}改变了以前在driver中直接输出//的方式，同时也简化了标点控制。
 \renewbibmacro*{in:}{%
  \iftoggle{bbx:gbpunctin}{\printtext{\texttt{//}\allowbreak}}%\addthinspace
-                         {\setunit{\adddot\addspace}\printtext{\bibstring{in}}}}%\newunit\newblock\intitlepunct
-
+                         {\setunit{\adddot\addspace}%
+                         \iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}%
+                         {\printtext{\bibstring{incn}}}%
+                         {\printtext{\bibstring{in}}}%
+                         }}%\newunit\newblock\intitlepunct
+
+%
+%   修改type域的输出格式
+%   2019.02.12，v1.0q，byhzz
+%    使其可以区分中英文输出不同的格式，比如博士论文英文输出PHD thesis，中文则是博士学位论文
+\DeclareFieldFormat{type}%
+{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}%
+    {\ifbibxstring{#1cn}{\bibxstring{#1cn}}{#1}}%
+    {\ifbibstring{#1}{\bibstring{#1}}{#1}}%
+}
 
 %=====================================================================
 %设置驱动格式
@@ -3031,8 +3273,9 @@ test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%增加的译者信息
   \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype}{%
   \printfield{type}%
-  \setunit*{\addspace}%
+  \setunit*{\addspace}}{}%
   \printfield{number}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \printfield{version}%
@@ -3118,7 +3361,9 @@ test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{
 \usebibmacro{in:}%
 %\printtext{\texttt{//}\addthinspace}%
   \usebibmacro{bybookauthor}%
-  \ifnameundef{bookauthor}{}{\newunit}%替换下一句
+  \ifnameundef{bookauthor}{%
+  \ifnameundef{editor}{}{\newunit}%
+  }{\newunit}%替换下一句
   %\newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}%
   \setunit{\addcolon}\printfield{volume}\printfield{number}%增加卷和册信息
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015.cbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015.cbx
index 5aa650816e4..949c37dca92 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015.cbx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015.cbx
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
 %% Released under the LaTeX Project Public License v1.3c or later
 %% ---------------------------------------------------------------
 %%
-\def\versionofgbtstyle{2019/02/11 v1.0q}
+\def\versionofgbtstyle{2019/03/28 v1.0r}
 \ProvidesFile{gb7714-2015.cbx}[\versionofgbtstyle biblatex citation style]
 
 %
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015ay.bbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015ay.bbx
index 23517c5562b..593f17155a9 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015ay.bbx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015ay.bbx
@@ -10,10 +10,10 @@
 %
 %   版本和时间信息
 %
-\def\versionofgbtstyle{2019/02/11 v1.0q}
+\def\versionofgbtstyle{2019/03/28 v1.0r}
 \def\versionofbiblatex{\abx@version}
 \ProvidesFile{gb7714-2015ay.bbx}[\versionofgbtstyle biblatex bibliography style]
-\RequireBiber[3]%显式指定用biber后端
+%\RequireBiber[3]%显式指定用biber后端，当用bibtex时会报错，但其实不会影响编译，只是采用bibtex后无法达成格式需求
 
 %=====================================================================
 %加载标准样式
@@ -190,9 +190,11 @@
     %为与lee zeping的bst的样式统一，使用mark和medium这两域名
     %为单个条目的姓名格式控制增加nameformat和namefmtid两个域
     %为缩略信息文献表增加了shortbooktitle域
+    %为多语言排序增加了lansortorder域
     \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{mark,medium,nameformat}
     \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=integer]{namefmtid}
     \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{shortbooktitle}
+    \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{lansortorder}
 
 
 
@@ -200,6 +202,14 @@
 %   设置宏包选项
 %=====================================================================
     %
+    %   增加一个控制是否输出type域的选项
+    %   20190212,v1,0q,hzz
+    \newtoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype}
+    \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfieldtype}[false]{%biblatex低版本
+      \settoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype}{#1}}
+    \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfieldtype}
+
+    %
     %   增加一个选项，用于控制是否实现GB/T 7714-2015标准的脚注文献表
     %   20190203，v1.0p，hzz
     %   原理方法:默认做patch，文献引用带圈上标数字表示，脚注中的文献用带圈非上标数字做标签
@@ -209,7 +219,11 @@
       \ifstrequal{#1}{false}{}{\execgbfootbib}}
     \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfootbib}
 
-    %%
+        %%
+    \newlength{\footbibmargin}
+    \newlength{\footbiblabelsep}
+    \setlength{\footbibmargin}{1em}%脚注的段落左侧缩进距离
+    \setlength{\footbiblabelsep}{0.5em}%脚注中标记号与脚注段落的间距
     \def\execgbfootbib%
     {%
     %开启引用跟踪计数器，为使用\ifciteseen等测试命令
@@ -221,8 +235,79 @@
     %beamer类因为其特殊性，为避免冲突不调footmisc。
     %同时footmisc与hyperref宏包也不兼容，所以使用footmisc时会破坏脚注的超链接
     %如果要实现超链接可以将下句注释掉，这里留着主要是实现悬挂对齐。
-    \PassOptionsToPackage{perpage,hang}{footmisc}
-    \RequirePackage{footmisc}}
+    %\PassOptionsToPackage{perpage,hang}{footmisc}%
+    %\RequirePackage{footmisc}%
+
+    %重新实现脚注的根据单页重设脚注号码
+    %重新实现脚注的悬挂对齐问题，不再使用footmisc，直接从latex核心代码和hyperref代码进行修改
+    %v1.0q 20190317 hzz
+    \@addtoreset{footnote}{page}%重设计数器
+
+\@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{%加载hyperref则对\H@@footnotetext做重定义
+    \long\def\H@@footnotetext##1{\insert\footins{%
+    \reset@font\footnotesize
+    \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+    \splittopskip\footnotesep
+    \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM
+    \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
+    \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+       \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark
+    }%
+    \color@begingroup
+    \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进
+      \@makefntext{%
+        \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox%
+        }%
+    \color@endgroup}}%
+  \long\def\H@@mpfootnotetext##1{%
+  \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
+    \unvbox\@mpfootins
+    \reset@font\footnotesize
+    \hsize\columnwidth
+    \@parboxrestore
+    \protected@edef\@currentlabel
+         {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
+    \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进
+    \color@begingroup
+      \@makefntext{%
+        \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
+    \color@endgroup}}
+    }{%否则对latex核心代码中的\@footnotetext做重定义
+    \long\def\@footnotetext##1{\insert\footins{%
+    \reset@font\footnotesize
+    \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+    \splittopskip\footnotesep
+    \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM
+    \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
+    \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+       \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark
+    }%
+    \color@begingroup
+    \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进
+      \@makefntext{%
+        \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox%
+        }%
+    \color@endgroup}}%
+
+    \long\def\@mpfootnotetext##1{%
+    \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
+    \unvbox\@mpfootins
+    \reset@font\footnotesize
+    \hsize\columnwidth
+    \@parboxrestore
+    \protected@edef\@currentlabel
+         {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
+    \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进
+    \color@begingroup
+      \@makefntext{%
+        \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
+    \color@endgroup}}
+    }
+
+    \long\def\@makefntext##1{%增加了脚注标记与正文的间隔
+    \parindent 1em\noindent \hb@xt@ 0em{\hss \@makefnmark\makebox[\footbiblabelsep]{}}##1}
+
+    }
 
     %
     %使脚注标记加圈并设置数字的字体为tiny，不使用修改thefootnote的方式
@@ -238,16 +323,22 @@
     %
     %判断当前文献是否已经引用过且是做的footfullcite(即已经作为脚注输出文献内容)
     %记录首次输出时的脚注号码，用于后面再次引用该文献时的输出，比如同(4)。
+    %v1.0q 20190309 区分使脚注标注适应minipage中的情况
     \newbibmacro*{citesavefn}{%
-        \ifciteseen%当被引用过，则为true
+        \ifciteseen%当被引用过为true
         {\ifcsdef{sec\arabic{refsection}et\thefield{entrykey}}%当已经定义过脚注序号信息
             {\csgdef{labelsec\arabic{refsection}et\thefield{entrykey}}{%
-             \str@sameentry\xdef\@thefnmark{\csuse{sec\arabic{refsection}et\thefield{entrykey}}}%
-             \@makefnmark}%
-             }%
-            {\csxdef{sec\arabic{refsection}et\thefield{entrykey}}{\arabic{footnote}}}%
+    \str@sameentry\gdef\@thefnmark{\csuse{sec\arabic{refsection}et\thefield{entrykey}}}%
+    \@makefnmark%
+            }}%
+            {\csxdef{sec\arabic{refsection}et\thefield{entrykey}}{%
+            \ifcsstring{@mpfn}{mpfootnote}{\@alph\c@mpfootnote}{\thefootnote}%
+            }}%
         }%
-        {\csxdef{sec\arabic{refsection}et\thefield{entrykey}}{\arabic{footnote}}}%
+        {\csxdef{sec\arabic{refsection}et\thefield{entrykey}}{%
+        \ifcsstring{@mpfn}{mpfootnote}{\@alph\c@mpfootnote}{\thefootnote}%
+        %判断在minipage中比较麻烦，这里使用\@mpfn的定义进行判断
+        }}%
     }
 
     %
@@ -320,6 +411,10 @@
     \def\str@numbercn{册}
     \def\str@serialcn{第}
     \def\str@sameentry{同}
+    \def\str@incn{见}
+    \def\str@mathesiscn{硕士学位论文}
+    \def\str@phdthesiscn{博士学位论文}
+    \def\str@editorcn{主编}
 
     \AtEndOfPackage{%
 	\iftoggle{bbx:codegbk}{%
@@ -458,6 +553,41 @@
 
 \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2016/03/27}
   { % 针对biblatex>=3.3版本的选项设置
+
+    %   增加不同语言排序的切换选项
+    %   gblanorder=chineseahead的顺序为cn，jp，kr，en，fr，ru
+    %   gblanorder=englishahead的顺序为en，fr，ru，cn，jp，kr
+    %   gblanorder=cn;en;ru;fr;jp;kr的顺序为指定的cn;en;ru;fr;jp;kr，自定义内容可以随意写以分号分隔
+    %   v1.0q，20190307，hzz
+    %
+    \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gblanorder}[chineseahead]{%
+        \ifstrequal{#1}{chineseahead}%%中文在前的顺序
+            {\gdef\lancnorder{1}\gdef\lanjporder{2}\gdef\lankrorder{3}%
+             \gdef\lanenorder{4}\gdef\lanfrorder{5}\gdef\lanruorder{6}}%
+            {%
+            \ifstrequal{#1}{englishahead}%
+                {\execlanodeah\dealsortlan}%
+                {\execlanodudf{#1}\dealsortlan}%
+            }%
+    }
+    \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gblanorder}
+
+    \def\execlanodeah{%中文在后的顺序
+        \gdef\lancnorder{4}
+        \gdef\lanjporder{5}
+        \gdef\lankrorder{6}
+        \gdef\lanenorder{1}
+        \gdef\lanfrorder{2}
+        \gdef\lanruorder{3}}
+
+    \newcounter{lanordernum}
+    \newcommand{\execlanodudf}[1]{%like：cn;en;ru;fr;jp;kr
+        \setcounter{lanordernum}{0}
+        \DeclareListParser{\parsinglanorder}{;}
+        \renewcommand*{\do}[1]{\stepcounter{lanordernum}\csxdef{lan##1order}{\thelanordernum}}
+        \parsinglanorder{#1}
+    }
+
     %   增加本地化字符串的中英文切换选项
     %   gbcitelocal指标注中的本地化字符串
     %   gbbiblocal 指文献表中的本地化字符串
@@ -498,8 +628,9 @@
         \ifstrequal{#1}{uppercase}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{0}}{}%
         \ifstrequal{#1}{lowercase}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{1}}{}%
         \ifstrequal{#1}{givenahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{2}}{}%given-family
-        \ifstrequal{#1}{familyahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{3}}{}
-        \ifstrequal{#1}{pinyin}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{4}}{}%family-given
+        \ifstrequal{#1}{familyahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{3}}{}%family-given
+        \ifstrequal{#1}{pinyin}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{4}}{}%
+        \ifstrequal{#1}{reverseorder}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{5}}{}%family-given/given-family
     }
     \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbnamefmt}
 
@@ -514,6 +645,13 @@
 
   }
   {
+    %   增加不同语言排序的切换选项
+    %   biblatex 3.4及以下版本不能使用多个stylesourcemap，所以不使用该选项
+    %   这里给出仅为兼容性考虑
+    %   v1.0q，20190307，hzz
+    %
+    \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gblanorder}[chineseahead]{}
+
     %
     %   增加序号标签格式处理选项，作者年制不做处理，给出只为兼容选项考虑
     %   v1.0l，20180623，hzz
@@ -529,6 +667,7 @@
         \ifstrequal{#1}{givenahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{2}}{}%given-family
         \ifstrequal{#1}{familyahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{3}}{}
         \ifstrequal{#1}{pinyin}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{4}}{}%family-given
+        \ifstrequal{#1}{reverseorder}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{5}}{}%family-given/given-family
     }
     \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbnamefmt}
 
@@ -610,6 +749,11 @@
     \NewBibliographyString{volumecn}
     \NewBibliographyString{numbercn}
     \NewBibliographyString{serialcn}
+    \NewBibliographyString{incn}
+    \NewBibliographyString{mathesiscn}
+    \NewBibliographyString{phdthesiscn}
+    \NewBibliographyString{editorcn}
+    \NewBibliographyString{editorscn}
 
     %
     %   修改一些当地化字符串
@@ -639,6 +783,11 @@
        andotherskr={외},
        andjp={和},
        andkr={和},
+       incn={\str@incn\addcolon\addspace},
+       mathesiscn={\str@mathesiscn},
+       phdthesiscn={\str@phdthesiscn},
+       editorscn={\str@editorcn},
+       editorcn={\str@editorcn},
 }
 
 
@@ -815,11 +964,6 @@
             \step[fieldsource=version] %有时会把version和edition混淆，处理后直接用edition
             \step[fieldset=edition, origfieldval]
             }
-        \map{
-            \pertype{inbook}
-            \step[fieldsource=editor]%有时会把editor和bookauthor混淆，处理后使用bookauthor
-            \step[fieldset=bookauthor, origfieldval]
-            }
         \map{%兼容老的standard类型，确定文献类型标识符
             \pertype{standard}
             \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={S}]
@@ -835,8 +979,6 @@
             \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={C}]
             \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
             \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval]
-            \step[fieldsource=editor]%%有时会把editor和bookauthor混淆，处理后使用bookauthor
-            \step[fieldset=bookauthor, origfieldval]
             }
         \map{
             \pertype{proceedings}
@@ -849,8 +991,6 @@
             \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={G}]
             \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
             \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval]
-            \step[fieldsource=editor]%%有时会把editor和bookauthor混淆，处理后使用bookauthor
-            \step[fieldset=bookauthor, origfieldval]
             }
         \map{
             \pertype{collection}
@@ -1050,28 +1190,36 @@
             \step[fieldset=userd,origfieldval]
             }
         \map{%当文献给出language域时，设置文献要使用的本地化字符串的语言
-            \step[fieldsource=language,match=english,final]
+            %biblatex 3.11及以下版本仅有match是区分大小写的，而3.12版开始用matchi来区分大小，而match不区分
+            %这里为兼容3.11及以下版本，所以用一个复杂一点的正则表达式
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(e|E)(n|N)(g|G)(l|L)(i|I)(s|S)(h|H)},final]
             \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}]
+            \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanenorder]
             }
         \map{
-            \step[fieldsource=language,match=russian,final]
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(r|R)(u|U)(s|S)(s|S)(i|I)(a|A)(n|N)},final]
             \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={russian}]
+            \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanruorder]
             }
         \map{%
-            \step[fieldsource=language,match=french,final]
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(f|F)(r|R)(e|E)(n|N)(c|C)(h|H)},final]
             \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={french}]
+            \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanfrorder]
             }
         \map{%
-            \step[fieldsource=language,match=chinese,final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(c|C)(h|H)(i|I)(n|N)(e|E)(s|S)(e|E)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
             \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}]
+            \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lancnorder]
             }
         \map{%
-            \step[fieldsource=language,match=japnese,final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(j|J)(a|A)(p|P)(a|A)(n|N)(e|E)(s|S)(e|E)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
             \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}]
+            \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanjporder]
             }
         \map{%
-            \step[fieldsource=language,match=korean,final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(k|K)(o|O)(r|R)(e|E)(a|A)(n|N)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
             \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}]
+            \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lankrorder]
             }
         \map{%尝试未定义数据模型的standard类型映射为其他类型book或inbook，
                  %standard类型在blx-dm中有出现，但仅定义了类型，域和约束等都没有定义
@@ -1082,14 +1230,14 @@
             \map{%剩下的全部映射为book
             \step[typesource=standard, typetarget=book, final]
             }
-            \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置
-            \step[typesource=mastersthesis, typetarget=thesis, final]
-            %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=mathesis]
-            }
-            \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置
-            \step[typesource=phdthesis, typetarget=thesis, final]
-            %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=phdthesis]
-            }
+%            \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置
+%            \step[typesource=mastersthesis, typetarget=thesis, final]
+%            %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=mathesis]
+%            }
+%            \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置
+%            \step[typesource=phdthesis, typetarget=thesis, final]
+%            %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=phdthesis]
+%            }
             \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置
             \step[typesource=techreport, typetarget=report, final]
             %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=techreport]
@@ -1253,6 +1401,41 @@
         }
 }
 
+%
+%   不同语言分集调整的实现方式
+%
+%   原理方法:利用样式层的动态数据修改lansortorder域来实现排序
+\def\dealsortlan{
+    \DeclareStyleSourcemap{
+        \maps[datatype=bibtex]{
+        \map[overwrite]{%当文献给出language域时，设置文献要使用的本地化字符串的语言
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=english,final]
+            \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanenorder]
+            }
+        \map[overwrite]{
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=russian,final]
+            \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanruorder]
+            }
+        \map[overwrite]{%
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=french,final]
+            \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanfrorder]
+            }
+        \map[overwrite]{%
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=chinese,final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
+            \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lancnorder]
+            }
+        \map[overwrite]{%
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=japanese,final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
+            \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanjporder]
+            }
+        \map[overwrite]{%
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=korean,final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
+            \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lankrorder]
+            }
+        }
+    }
+}
+
 
 %
 %驱动别名等价于驱动层映射
@@ -1285,15 +1468,13 @@
         \field{sortkey}
       }
       \sort{
-    	\field{language}
+    	\field{lansortorder}%language
     	}
       \sort{%[direction=descending]
         \field{sortname}
         \field{author}
         \field{editor}
         \field{translator}
-        \field{sorttitle}
-        \field{title}
       }
       \sort{
         \field{sortyear}
@@ -1318,15 +1499,13 @@
         \field{sortkey}
       }
       \sort{
-    	\field{language}
+    	\field{lansortorder}%language
     	}
       \sort[direction=descending]{
         \field{sortname}
         \field{author}
         \field{editor}
         \field{translator}
-        \field{sorttitle}
-        \field{title}
       }
       \sort{
         \field{sortyear}
@@ -1351,7 +1530,7 @@
         \field{sortkey}
       }
       \sort{
-    	\field{language}
+    	\field{lansortorder}%language
     	}
       \sort[direction=descending]{
         \field{sortyear}
@@ -1362,8 +1541,6 @@
         \field{author}
         \field{editor}
         \field{translator}
-        \field{sorttitle}
-        \field{title}
       }
       \sort{
         \field{sorttitle}
@@ -1384,7 +1561,7 @@
         \field{sortkey}
       }
       \sort{
-    	\field{language}
+    	\field{lansortorder}%language
     	}
       \sort{
         \field{sortyear}
@@ -1395,8 +1572,6 @@
         \field{author}
         \field{editor}
         \field{translator}
-        \field{sorttitle}
-        \field{title}
       }
       \sort{
         \field{sorttitle}
@@ -1422,15 +1597,13 @@
         \field{sortkey}
       }
       \sort{
-    	\field{language}
+    	\field{lansortorder}%language
     	}
       \sort{%[direction=descending]
         \field{sortname}
         \field{author}
         \field{editor}
         \field{translator}
-        \field{sorttitle}
-        \field{title}
       }
       \sort{
         \field{sortyear}
@@ -1455,15 +1628,13 @@
         \field{sortkey}
       }
       \sort{
-    	\field{language}
+    	\field{lansortorder}%language
     	}
       \sort[direction=descending]{%
         \field{sortname}
         \field{author}
         \field{editor}
         \field{translator}
-        \field{sorttitle}
-        \field{title}
       }
       \sort{
         \field{sortyear}
@@ -1488,7 +1659,7 @@
         \field{sortkey}
       }
       \sort{
-    	\field{language}
+    	\field{lansortorder}%language
     	}
       \sort[direction=descending]{
         \field{sortyear}
@@ -1499,8 +1670,6 @@
         \field{author}
         \field{editor}
         \field{translator}
-        \field{sorttitle}
-        \field{title}
       }
       \sort{
         \field{sorttitle}
@@ -1521,7 +1690,7 @@
         \field{sortkey}
       }
       \sort{
-    	\field{language}
+    	\field{lansortorder}%language
     	}
       \sort{%[direction=ascending]
         \field{sortyear}
@@ -1532,8 +1701,6 @@
         \field{author}
         \field{editor}
         \field{translator}
-        \field{sorttitle}
-        \field{title}
       }
       \sort{
         \field{sorttitle}
@@ -1623,28 +1790,42 @@ test {\iftoggle{iftlseven}}%biblatex<=3.7
 %   而[]中间的内容，从4.6.2节的例子看也是可以分割的，因此内部的nobreak也可以去掉
 %
 \DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflag}{%
-\iftoggle{bbx:url}{\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
-{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}}%
-{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}}%
-}{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}}}
+\iftoggle{bbx:url}%
+    {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
+        {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}}%
+        {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}}%
+    }%
+    {\ifentrytype{online}%
+        {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}}%
+        {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}}%
+    }%
+}
+
 
 %
 %   新增用于报纸的文献类型标识符的格式
 %
 \DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflagn}{%用于报纸newspaper
-\iftoggle{bbx:url}{\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
-{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
-{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}\nobreak}%
-}{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}}
+\iftoggle{bbx:url}%
+    {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
+        {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
+        {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}\nobreak}%
+    }%
+    {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
+}
+
 
 %
 %   新增用于标准的文献类型标识符的格式
 %
 \DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflags}{%用于标准standard
-\iftoggle{bbx:url}{\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
-{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
-{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}\nobreak}%
-}{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}}
+\iftoggle{bbx:url}%
+    {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
+        {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
+        {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}\nobreak}%
+    }%
+    {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
+}
 
 %
 %   重设title等参考文献信息的输出格式
@@ -1751,20 +1932,21 @@ test {\iftoggle{iftlseven}}%biblatex<=3.7
 %   v1.0O,20190103,hzz,修改利用新定义的一个分隔符strandothersdelim
 %
 %   原理方法:判断作者或译者是否中文，若中文用字符等，否则用et al. 。
+%   \printnames由start-stop控制项数，默认是1和maxnames/minnames
 \renewbibmacro*{name:andothers}{%
   \ifboolexpr{
     test {\ifnumequal{\value{listcount}}{\value{liststop}}}
     and
     test \ifmorenames
-  }{\ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{1}%
-       {\finalandcomma}%
-       {}%biblatex作者要区别单作者加等的情况，这里为符合gbt7714-2015第7.2节的要求加上了逗号。
+  }{\ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{1}%注意这里试图去区分姓名总数大于1的情况，当姓名总数大于1时，最后一个姓名后面先加入一个\finalandcomma
+       {\finalandcomma}%目前国标没有这样的区分要求，如果有需要也是可以这么去做的。
+       {}%
 \printdelim{andothersdelim}\printdelim{strandothersdelim}%
 }{%当是译者的时候需要特殊处理：从7.2节看等，译前面加逗号，但从示例看等和译同时出现时，译前的逗号没有，比如：
 %袁训来, 陈哲, 肖书海, 等.
 %胡泳, 范海燕, 译.
 %潘惠霞, 魏婧, 杨艳, 等译.
-\ifcurrentname{translator}{\addcomma}{}%
+\ifcurrentname{translator}{\addcomma\addthinspace}{}%为了实现上述第二个示例情况做的处理
 }}
 
 %   修改省略作者后的本地化字符串，比如et al.
@@ -1775,18 +1957,16 @@ test {\iftoggle{iftlseven}}%biblatex<=3.7
 %   首先设置全局的，然后设置文献表中的，这一等价于将所有的cite命令环境都设置过了
 %   而不用对每一个引用命令单独设置，比如cite，parancite，textcite都设置
 \DeclareDelimFormat{strandothersdelim}{%
-  \ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{2}{\finalandcomma}{}%
-  \addspace%
-  \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
-  \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}%
-  \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
-  \ifcurrentname{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}%
-  \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
+  \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%这里使用\iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}替代ifcurrentname因为标注中使用ifcurrentname无效
+  \iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}%
+  \iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
+  \iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}%
+  \iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
   \ifcase\value{gbcitelocalcase}%
-    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andothersincitecn}}{}%中文已经通过english本地化字符串定义
-    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andotherskr}}{}%韩语未定义，所以与bib中一致
-    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japnese}{\bibstring{andothersjp}}{}%日与同韩语
-    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\bibstring{andothersincite}}{}%英语已定义
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\ifbibstring{andothersincitecn}{\bibstring{andothersincitecn}}{\bibstring{andothers}}}{}%中文已经通过english本地化字符串定义
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\ifbibstring{andotherskr}{\bibstring{andotherskr}}{\bibstring{andothers}}}{}%韩语未定义，所以与bib中一致
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\ifbibstring{andothersjp}{\bibstring{andothersjp}}{\bibstring{andothers}}}{}%日与同韩语
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\ifbibstring{andothersincite}{\bibstring{andothersincite}}{\bibstring{andothers}}}{}%英语已定义
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%法语未定义，若要定义需要针对french本地化字符串定义
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%俄语未定义，若要定义需要针对russian本地化字符串定义
   \or%
@@ -1795,9 +1975,8 @@ test {\iftoggle{iftlseven}}%biblatex<=3.7
   \bibstring{andothersincite}%
   \fi}
 
+
 \DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{strandothersdelim}{%
-  \ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{2}{\finalandcomma}{}%
-  \addspace%
   \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
   \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}%
   \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
@@ -1806,7 +1985,7 @@ test {\iftoggle{iftlseven}}%biblatex<=3.7
   \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andotherscn}}{}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andotherskr}}{}%
-    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japnese}{\bibstring{andothersjp}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andothersjp}}{}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%
@@ -1836,7 +2015,7 @@ test {\iftoggle{iftlseven}}%biblatex<=3.7
   \ifcase\value{gbcitelocalcase}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andincitecn}}{}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andkr}}{}%
-    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japnese}{\bibstring{andjp}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andjp}}{}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\bibstring{andincite}}{}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
@@ -1858,7 +2037,7 @@ test {\iftoggle{iftlseven}}%biblatex<=3.7
   \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andcn}}{}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andkr}}{}%
-    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japnese}{\bibstring{andjp}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andjp}}{}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
@@ -1965,6 +2144,36 @@ test {\iftoggle{iftlseven}}%biblatex<=3.7
       {\namepartgiven}
       {\namepartprefix}
       {\namepartsuffix}%
+\or
+  \ifnumequal{\value{listcount}}{1}
+    {\ifgiveninits
+       {\usebibmacro{name:family-given}
+         {\namepartfamily}
+         {\namepartgiveni}
+         {\namepartprefix}
+         {\namepartsuffix}}
+       {\usebibmacro{name:family-given}
+         {\namepartfamily}
+         {\namepartgiven}
+         {\namepartprefix}
+         {\namepartsuffix}}%
+     \ifboolexpe{%
+       test {\ifdefvoid\namepartgiven}
+       and
+       test {\ifdefvoid\namepartprefix}}
+       {}
+       {\usebibmacro{name:revsdelim}}}
+    {\ifgiveninits
+       {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}
+         {\namepartfamily}
+         {\namepartgiveni}
+         {\namepartprefix}
+         {\namepartsuffix}}
+       {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}
+         {\namepartfamily}
+         {\namepartgiven}
+         {\namepartprefix}
+         {\namepartsuffix}}}%
 \fi
   \usebibmacro{name:andothers}}
 
@@ -2176,6 +2385,17 @@ test {\iftoggle{iftlseven}}%biblatex<=3.7
        {\usebibmacro{name:first-last}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}%
     \or
     \usebibmacro{name:gbpinyin}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}%
+    \or
+      \ifnumequal{\value{listcount}}{1}
+    {\iffirstinits
+       {\usebibmacro{name:last-first}{#1}{#4}{#5}{#7}}
+       {\usebibmacro{name:last-first}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}%
+     \ifblank{#3#5}
+       {}
+       {\usebibmacro{name:revsdelim}}}
+    {\iffirstinits
+       {\usebibmacro{name:first-last}{#1}{#4}{#5}{#7}}
+       {\usebibmacro{name:first-last}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}}%
   \fi
   \usebibmacro{name:andothers}}
 }
@@ -2606,6 +2826,7 @@ incollection,proceedings,inproceedings]{number}{%
                {\printdateextralabel}%
                {\printfield{labelyear}%
                 \printfield{extrayear}}}}}%
+	\newbibmacro{date+extradate}{\usebibmacro{date+extrayear}}
 }
 
 \defversion{3.4}{dateextra}{
@@ -2619,6 +2840,7 @@ incollection,proceedings,inproceedings]{number}{%
                {\printdateextralabel}%
                {\printfield{labelyear}%
                 \printfield{extrayear}}}}}%
+    \newbibmacro{date+extradate}{\usebibmacro{date+extrayear}}
 }
 \defversion{3.7}{dateextra}{
     \DeclareDelimFormat{nameyeardelim}{\addcomma\space}
@@ -2631,6 +2853,8 @@ incollection,proceedings,inproceedings]{number}{%
            {\printlabeldateextra}%
            {\printfield{labelyear}%
             \printfield{extrayear}}}}}%
+			
+\newbibmacro{date+extradate}{\usebibmacro{date+extrayear}}
 }
 \defversion{3.8}{dateextra}{
     \DeclareDelimFormat{nameyeardelim}{\addcomma\space}
@@ -2666,8 +2890,40 @@ incollection,proceedings,inproceedings]{number}{%
          \iflabeldateisdate
            {\printdateextra}
            {\printlabeldateextra}}}}%
+
 }
 
+
+%
+%为mergedate增加选项none，即实现年份不提前到作者后面的标签中
+%也不打印用于区分同作者同年份文献的标识符如(a，b，c)
+%目的是实现一些特殊的文献表样式比如ucas的作者年制
+%v1.0q,20190212,hzz
+\def\bbx@opt@mergedate@none{%
+  \renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{%
+    \iffieldundef{labelyear}
+      {}
+      {}}%[parens]\printtext{\printlabeldateextra}
+\renewbibmacro*{bbx:ifmergeddate}{\@secondoftwo}%
+\renewbibmacro*{issue+date}{%去掉括号
+\setunit{\addcomma\addspace}%
+  \printtext{%去掉了[parens]
+    \iffieldundef{issue}
+      {%\usebibmacro{date}
+        \iffieldundef{note}{\usebibmacro{date}}%判断一下，是否是报纸
+        {\iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{\usebibmacro{newsdate}}%判断是否为报纸
+                                     {\usebibmacro{date}}%
+      }}%
+      {\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{\printfield{issue}%
+       \setunit*{\addspace}}%
+       %\usebibmacro{date}
+         \iffieldundef{note}{\usebibmacro{date}}%判断一下，是否是报纸
+        {\iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{\usebibmacro{newsdate}}%判断是否为报纸
+                                     {\usebibmacro{date}}%
+        }}}%
+  %\newunit
+  }}
+
 \iftoggle{iftlfive}{\switchversion{3.0}{dateextra}}{}%biblatex<=3.2
 \iftoggle{iftlsix}{\switchversion{3.4}{dateextra}}{}%3.3<=biblatex<=3.6
 \iftoggle{iftlseven}{\switchversion{3.7}{dateextra}}{}%biblatex=3.7
@@ -2781,7 +3037,46 @@ incollection,proceedings,inproceedings]{number}{%
   }
 
 %
+%   编者的符号修改一下
+%   v1.0 2016-07-01
+%   v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz 修改editortype前的标点
+%
+\renewbibmacro*{editor}{%
+  \ifboolexpr{
+    test \ifuseeditor
+    and
+    not test {\ifnameundef{editor}}
+  }
+    {\usebibmacro{bbx:dashcheck}
+       {%\bibnamedash
+       \printnames{editor}%
+       }
+       {\printnames{editor}%
+        %\setunit{\printdelim{editortypedelim}}%
+        %\usebibmacro{bbx:savehash}
+        }%
+     \usebibmacro{editorstrg}%
+     %\clearname{editor}%
+     \setunit{\printdelim{nameyeardelim}}}%
+    {\global\undef\bbx@lasthash
+     \usebibmacro{labeltitle}%
+     \setunit*{\printdelim{nonameyeardelim}}}%
+	 \ifboolexpr{%
+test {\ifentrytype{inbook}}
+or
+test {\ifentrytype{incollection}}
+or
+test {\ifentrytype{inproceedings}}
+or
+test {\ifentrytype{conference}}
+}%
+{}%
+{\usebibmacro{date+extradate}}}
+
+%
 %   编者类型做一修改
+%   v1.0 2016-07-01
+%   v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz 修改editortype不同语言的不同本地化字符串
 %
 \renewbibmacro*{editorstrg}{%源来自biblatex.DEF
   \printtext[editortype]{%
@@ -2801,12 +3096,71 @@ incollection,proceedings,inproceedings]{number}{%
             or
             test {\ifandothers{editor}}
           }
-            {\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}
-            {\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}}
+            {\printdelim{streditortypes}}
+            {\printdelim{streditortype}}}
          {\thefield{editortype}}}%
          }}
 
 %
+%   编者类型的本地化字符串输出
+%   v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz
+%   能对不同条目类型作格式设置的域格式，能对不同环境做格式设置的分隔符
+%   能对不同文境作设置的包括排序，标签等
+%   这里因为考虑可能标注和文献表中存在不同，所以用分隔符来输出本地化字符串
+%
+\DeclareDelimFormat{streditortypes}{%
+  \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
+  \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
+  \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
+  \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}scn}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}skr}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}sjp}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}%
+  \or%
+  \bibstring{\thefield{editortype}scn}%
+  \or%
+  \addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}%
+  \fi}
+%
+\DeclareDelimFormat{streditortype}{%
+  \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
+  \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
+  \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
+  \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}cn}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}kr}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}jp}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}%
+  \or%
+  \bibstring{\thefield{editortype}cn}%
+  \or%
+  \addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}%
+  \fi}
+
+
+%
+%   bookauthor域的输出，
+%   v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz
+% 不再对editor和bookauthor做sourcemap，而是下面的宏内逻辑代替，
+% 使得除使用bookauthor外也可以使用editor，便于在使用editor时使用editortype
+\renewbibmacro*{bybookauthor}{%
+    \ifnameundef{bookauthor}%
+        {\ifnameundef{editor}%
+            {}%
+            {\ifnamesequal{author}{editor}%
+                {}{\usebibmacro{editor}}}%
+        }%
+        {\ifnamesequal{author}{bookauthor}%
+            {}{\printnames{bookauthor}}%
+        }%
+}
+
+%
 %   修改期刊的标题
 %
 \renewbibmacro*{periodical}{%源来自biblatex.DEF
@@ -2912,12 +3266,26 @@ incollection,proceedings,inproceedings]{number}{%
 %
 %   修改in:用于inbook、incollection、inproceedings等类型
 %   2018.04.20,v1.0k,renewed marco，by hzz
+%   20190212,v1.0q,增加中英文区分，by hzz
 %
 %   原理方法:使用bibmacro{in:}改变了以前在driver中直接输出//的方式，同时也简化了标点控制。
 \renewbibmacro*{in:}{%
  \iftoggle{bbx:gbpunctin}{\printtext{\texttt{//}\allowbreak}}%\addthinspace
-                         {\setunit{\adddot\addspace}\printtext{\bibstring{in}}}}%\newunit\newblock\intitlepunct
-
+                         {\setunit{\adddot\addspace}%
+                         \iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}%
+                         {\printtext{\bibstring{incn}}}%
+                         {\printtext{\bibstring{in}}}%
+                         }}%\newunit\newblock\intitlepunct
+
+%
+%   修改type域的输出格式
+%   2019.02.12，v1.0q，byhzz
+%    使其可以区分中英文输出不同的格式，比如博士论文英文输出PHD thesis，中文则是博士学位论文
+\DeclareFieldFormat{type}%
+{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}%
+    {\ifbibxstring{#1cn}{\bibxstring{#1cn}}{#1}}%
+    {\ifbibstring{#1}{\bibstring{#1}}{#1}}%
+}
 
 %=====================================================================
 %设置驱动格式
@@ -3224,8 +3592,10 @@ test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%增加的译者信息
   \newunit\newblock
-  \printfield{type}%
+  \iftoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype}{%
+ \printfield{type}%
   \setunit*{\addspace}%
+  }{}%
   \printfield{number}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \printfield{version}%
@@ -3314,7 +3684,9 @@ test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{
 \usebibmacro{in:}%
 %\printtext{\texttt{//}\addthinspace}%
   \usebibmacro{bybookauthor}%
-  \ifnameundef{bookauthor}{}{\newunit}%替换下一句
+  \ifnameundef{bookauthor}{%
+  \ifnameundef{editor}{}{\newunit}%
+  }{\newunit}%替换下一句
   %\newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}%
   \setunit{\addcolon}\printfield{volume}\printfield{number}%增加卷和册信息
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015ay.cbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015ay.cbx
index 133d4a727ab..3c35d2891d8 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015ay.cbx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015ay.cbx
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
 %% Released under the LaTeX Project Public License v1.3c or later
 %% ---------------------------------------------------------------
 %%
-\def\versionofgbtstyle{2019/02/11 v1.0q}
+\def\versionofgbtstyle{2019/03/28 v1.0r}
 \ProvidesFile{gb7714-2015ay.cbx}[\versionofgbtstyle biblatex citation style]
 
 %
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015ms.bbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015ms.bbx
index 9b652a900e0..186f5577869 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015ms.bbx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015ms.bbx
@@ -11,10 +11,11 @@
 %
 %   版本和时间信息
 %
-\def\versionofgbtstyle{2019/02/11 v1.0q}
+\def\versionofgbtstyle{2019/03/28 v1.0r}
 \def\versionofbiblatex{\abx@version}
 \ProvidesFile{gb7714-2015ms.bbx}[\versionofgbtstyle biblatex bibliography style]
-\RequireBiber[3]%显式指定用biber后端
+%\RequireBiber[3]%显式指定用biber后端，当用bibtex时会报错，但其实不会影响编译，只是采用bibtex后无法达成格式需求
+
 
 %=====================================================================
 %   加载标准样式
@@ -80,9 +81,11 @@
     %为与lee zeping的bst的样式统一，使用mark和medium这两域名
     %为单个条目的姓名格式控制增加nameformat和namefmtid两个域
     %为缩略信息文献表增加了shortbooktitle域
+    %为多语言排序增加了lansortorder域
     \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{mark,medium,nameformat}
     \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=integer]{namefmtid}
     \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{shortbooktitle}
+    \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{lansortorder}
 
 
 
@@ -90,6 +93,14 @@
 %   设置宏包选项
 %=====================================================================
     %
+    %   增加一个控制是否输出type域的选项
+    %   20190212,v1,0q,hzz
+    \newtoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype}
+    \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfieldtype}[false]{%biblatex低版本
+      \settoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype}{#1}}
+    \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfieldtype}
+
+    %
     %   增加一个选项，用于控制是否实现GB/T 7714-2015标准的脚注文献表
     %   20190203，v1.0p，hzz
     %   原理方法:默认做patch，文献引用带圈上标数字表示，脚注中的文献用带圈非上标数字做标签
@@ -99,7 +110,11 @@
       \ifstrequal{#1}{false}{}{\execgbfootbib}}
     \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfootbib}
 
-    %%
+        %%
+    \newlength{\footbibmargin}
+    \newlength{\footbiblabelsep}
+    \setlength{\footbibmargin}{1em}%脚注的段落左侧缩进距离
+    \setlength{\footbiblabelsep}{0.5em}%脚注中标记号与脚注段落的间距
     \def\execgbfootbib%
     {%
     %开启引用跟踪计数器，为使用\ifciteseen等测试命令
@@ -111,8 +126,80 @@
     %beamer类因为其特殊性，为避免冲突不调footmisc。
     %同时footmisc与hyperref宏包也不兼容，所以使用footmisc时会破坏脚注的超链接
     %如果要实现超链接可以将下句注释掉，这里留着主要是实现悬挂对齐。
-    \PassOptionsToPackage{perpage,hang}{footmisc}
-    \RequirePackage{footmisc}}
+    %\PassOptionsToPackage{perpage,hang}{footmisc}%
+    %\RequirePackage{footmisc}%
+
+    %重新实现脚注的根据单页重设脚注号码
+    %重新实现脚注的悬挂对齐问题，不再使用footmisc，直接从latex核心代码和hyperref代码进行修改
+    %v1.0q 20190317 hzz
+    \@addtoreset{footnote}{page}%重设计数器
+
+\@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{%加载hyperref则对\H@@footnotetext做重定义
+    \long\def\H@@footnotetext##1{\insert\footins{%
+    \reset@font\footnotesize
+    \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+    \splittopskip\footnotesep
+    \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM
+    \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
+    \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+       \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark
+    }%
+    \color@begingroup
+    \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进
+      \@makefntext{%
+        \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox%
+        }%
+    \color@endgroup}}%
+
+    \long\def\H@@mpfootnotetext##1{%
+    \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
+    \unvbox\@mpfootins
+    \reset@font\footnotesize
+    \hsize\columnwidth
+    \@parboxrestore
+    \protected@edef\@currentlabel
+         {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
+    \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进
+    \color@begingroup
+      \@makefntext{%
+        \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
+    \color@endgroup}}
+    }{%否则对latex核心代码中的\@footnotetext做重定义
+    \long\def\@footnotetext##1{\insert\footins{%
+    \reset@font\footnotesize
+    \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+    \splittopskip\footnotesep
+    \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM
+    \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
+    \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+       \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark
+    }%
+    \color@begingroup
+    \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进
+      \@makefntext{%
+        \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox%
+        }%
+    \color@endgroup}}%
+
+    \long\def\@mpfootnotetext##1{%
+    \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
+    \unvbox\@mpfootins
+    \reset@font\footnotesize
+    \hsize\columnwidth
+    \@parboxrestore
+    \protected@edef\@currentlabel
+         {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
+    \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进
+    \color@begingroup
+      \@makefntext{%
+        \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
+    \color@endgroup}}
+    }
+
+    \long\def\@makefntext##1{%增加了脚注标记与正文的间隔
+    \parindent 1em\noindent \hb@xt@ 0em{\hss \@makefnmark\makebox[\footbiblabelsep]{}}##1}
+
+    }
 
     %
     %使脚注标记加圈并设置数字的字体为tiny，不使用修改thefootnote的方式
@@ -128,6 +215,7 @@
     %
     %判断当前文献是否已经引用过且是做的footfullcite(即已经作为脚注输出文献内容)
     %记录首次输出时的脚注号码，用于后面再次引用该文献时的输出，比如同(4)。
+    %v1.0q 20190309 区分使脚注标注适应minipage中的情况
     \newbibmacro*{citesavefn}{%
         \ifciteseen%当被引用过为true
         {\ifcsdef{sec\arabic{refsection}et\thefield{entrykey}}%当已经定义过脚注序号信息
@@ -135,9 +223,14 @@
     \str@sameentry\gdef\@thefnmark{\csuse{sec\arabic{refsection}et\thefield{entrykey}}}%
     \@makefnmark%
             }}%
-            {\csxdef{sec\arabic{refsection}et\thefield{entrykey}}{\arabic{footnote}}}%
+            {\csxdef{sec\arabic{refsection}et\thefield{entrykey}}{%
+            \ifcsstring{@mpfn}{mpfootnote}{\@alph\c@mpfootnote}{\thefootnote}%
+            }}%
         }%
-        {\csxdef{sec\arabic{refsection}et\thefield{entrykey}}{\arabic{footnote}}}%
+        {\csxdef{sec\arabic{refsection}et\thefield{entrykey}}{%
+        \ifcsstring{@mpfn}{mpfootnote}{\@alph\c@mpfootnote}{\thefootnote}%
+        %判断在minipage中比较麻烦，这里使用\@mpfn的定义进行判断
+        }}%
     }
 
     %
@@ -209,6 +302,10 @@
     \def\str@numbercn{册}
     \def\str@serialcn{第}
     \def\str@sameentry{同}
+    \def\str@incn{见}
+    \def\str@mathesiscn{硕士学位论文}
+    \def\str@phdthesiscn{博士学位论文}
+    \def\str@editorcn{主编}
 
     \AtEndOfPackage{%
 	\iftoggle{bbx:codegbk}{%
@@ -333,6 +430,13 @@
     \def\thegbcitelocalcase{\the\c@gbcitelocalcase}
     \def\thegbbiblocalcase{\the\c@gbbiblocalcase}
 
+    %   增加不同语言排序的切换选项
+    %   numeric样式，不使用该选项，这里给出仅为兼容性考虑
+    %   v1.0q，20190307，hzz
+    %
+    \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gblanorder}[chineseahead]{}
+
+
     %
     %   增加本地化字符串的中英文切换选项
     %   gbcitelocal指标注中的本地化字符串
@@ -374,6 +478,7 @@
         \ifstrequal{#1}{givenahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{2}}{}%given-family
         \ifstrequal{#1}{familyahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{3}}{}
         \ifstrequal{#1}{pinyin}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{4}}{}%family-given
+        \ifstrequal{#1}{reverseorder}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{5}}{}%family-given/given-family
     }
 
 
@@ -442,6 +547,12 @@
     \NewBibliographyString{volumecn}
     \NewBibliographyString{numbercn}
     \NewBibliographyString{serialcn}
+    \NewBibliographyString{incn}
+    \NewBibliographyString{mathesiscn}
+    \NewBibliographyString{phdthesiscn}
+    \NewBibliographyString{editorcn}
+    \NewBibliographyString{editorscn}
+
 
     %
     %   修改一些当地化字符串
@@ -471,6 +582,11 @@
        andotherskr={외},
        andjp={和},
        andkr={和},
+       incn={\str@incn\addcolon\addspace},
+       mathesiscn={\str@mathesiscn},
+       phdthesiscn={\str@phdthesiscn},
+       editorscn={\str@editorcn},
+       editorcn={\str@editorcn},
 }
 
 
@@ -647,11 +763,6 @@
             \step[fieldsource=version] %有时会把version和edition混淆，处理后直接用edition
             \step[fieldset=edition, origfieldval]
             }
-        \map{
-            \pertype{inbook}
-            \step[fieldsource=editor]%有时会把editor和bookauthor混淆，处理后使用bookauthor
-            \step[fieldset=bookauthor, origfieldval]
-            }
         \map{%兼容老的standard类型，确定文献类型标识符
             \pertype{standard}
             \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={S}]
@@ -667,8 +778,6 @@
             \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={C}]
             \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
             \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval]
-            \step[fieldsource=editor]%%有时会把editor和bookauthor混淆，处理后使用bookauthor
-            \step[fieldset=bookauthor, origfieldval]
             }
         \map{
             \pertype{proceedings}
@@ -681,8 +790,6 @@
             \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={G}]
             \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
             \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval]
-            \step[fieldsource=editor]%%有时会把editor和bookauthor混淆，处理后使用bookauthor
-            \step[fieldset=bookauthor, origfieldval]
             }
         \map{
             \pertype{collection}
@@ -882,27 +989,27 @@
             \step[fieldset=userd,origfieldval]
             }
         \map{%当文献给出language域时，设置文献要使用的本地化字符串的语言
-            \step[fieldsource=language,match=english,final]
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(e|E)(n|N)(g|G)(l|L)(i|I)(s|S)(h|H)},final]
             \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}]
             }
         \map{
-            \step[fieldsource=language,match=russian,final]
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(r|R)(u|U)(s|S)(s|S)(i|I)(a|A)(n|N)},final]
             \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={russian}]
             }
         \map{%
-            \step[fieldsource=language,match=french,final]
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(f|F)(r|R)(e|E)(n|N)(c|C)(h|H)},final]
             \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={french}]
             }
         \map{%
-            \step[fieldsource=language,match=chinese,final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(c|C)(h|H)(i|I)(n|N)(e|E)(s|S)(e|E)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
             \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}]
             }
         \map{%
-            \step[fieldsource=language,match=japnese,final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(j|J)(a|A)(p|P)(a|A)(n|N)(e|E)(s|S)(e|E)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
             \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}]
             }
         \map{%
-            \step[fieldsource=language,match=korean,final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(k|K)(o|O)(r|R)(e|E)(a|A)(n|N)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
             \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}]
             }
 }
@@ -924,14 +1031,14 @@
             \map{%尝试未定义数据模型的standard类型映射为book，standard类型在blx-dm中有出现，但仅定义了类型，域和约束等都没有定义
             \step[typesource=standard, typetarget=book, final]%当不存在booktitle域是映射为book
             }
-            \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，将其先映射过来，并取消type设置
-            \step[typesource=mastersthesis, typetarget=thesis, final]
-            %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=mathesis]
-            }
-            \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，将其先映射过来，并取消type设置
-            \step[typesource=phdthesis, typetarget=thesis, final]
-            %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=phdthesis]
-            }
+%            \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，将其先映射过来，并取消type设置
+%            \step[typesource=mastersthesis, typetarget=thesis, final]
+%            %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=mathesis]
+%            }
+%            \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，将其先映射过来，并取消type设置
+%            \step[typesource=phdthesis, typetarget=thesis, final]
+%            %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=phdthesis]
+%            }
             \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，将其先映射过来，并取消type设置
             \step[typesource=techreport, typetarget=report, final]
             %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=techreport]
@@ -1154,28 +1261,40 @@
 %   而[]中间的内容，从4.6.2节的例子看也是可以分割的，因此内部的nobreak也可以去掉
 %
 \DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflag}{%
-\iftoggle{bbx:url}{\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
-{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}}%
-{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}}%
-}{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}}}
+\iftoggle{bbx:url}%
+    {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
+        {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}}%
+        {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}}%
+    }%
+    {\ifentrytype{online}%
+        {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}}%
+        {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}}%
+    }%
+}
 
 %
 %   新增用于报纸的文献类型标识符的格式
 %
 \DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflagn}{%用于报纸newspaper
-\iftoggle{bbx:url}{\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
-{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
-{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}\nobreak}%
-}{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}}
+\iftoggle{bbx:url}%
+    {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
+        {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
+        {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}\nobreak}%
+    }%
+    {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
+}
 
 %
 %   新增用于标准的文献类型标识符的格式
 %
 \DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflags}{%用于标准standard
-\iftoggle{bbx:url}{\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
-{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
-{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}\nobreak}%
-}{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}}
+\iftoggle{bbx:url}%
+    {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
+        {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
+        {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}\nobreak}%
+    }%
+    {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
+}
 
 %
 %   重设title等参考文献信息的输出格式
@@ -1247,6 +1366,36 @@
       {\namepartgiven}
       {\namepartprefix}
       {\namepartsuffix}%
+\or
+  \ifnumequal{\value{listcount}}{1}
+    {\ifgiveninits
+       {\usebibmacro{name:family-given}
+         {\namepartfamily}
+         {\namepartgiveni}
+         {\namepartprefix}
+         {\namepartsuffix}}
+       {\usebibmacro{name:family-given}
+         {\namepartfamily}
+         {\namepartgiven}
+         {\namepartprefix}
+         {\namepartsuffix}}%
+     \ifboolexpe{%
+       test {\ifdefvoid\namepartgiven}
+       and
+       test {\ifdefvoid\namepartprefix}}
+       {}
+       {\usebibmacro{name:revsdelim}}}
+    {\ifgiveninits
+       {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}
+         {\namepartfamily}
+         {\namepartgiveni}
+         {\namepartprefix}
+         {\namepartsuffix}}
+       {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}
+         {\namepartfamily}
+         {\namepartgiven}
+         {\namepartprefix}
+         {\namepartsuffix}}}%
 \fi
   \usebibmacro{name:andothers}}
 
@@ -1450,7 +1599,7 @@
 %
 %   重设专利title的输出，将文献类型标识符输出出去
 %
-\newbibmacro*{patenttitle}{%原输出来自biblatex.def文件
+\renewbibmacro*{patenttitle}{%原输出来自biblatex.def文件
   \ifboolexpr{%
     test{\iffieldundef{title}}%
     and%
@@ -1472,6 +1621,47 @@
 }%
 }
 
+%
+%   编者类型的本地化字符串输出
+%   v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz
+%   能对不同条目类型作格式设置的域格式，能对不同环境做格式设置的分隔符
+%   能对不同文境作设置的包括排序，标签等
+%   这里因为考虑可能标注和文献表中存在不同，所以用分隔符来输出本地化字符串
+%
+\DeclareDelimFormat{streditortypes}{%
+  \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
+  \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
+  \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
+  \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}scn}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}skr}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}sjp}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}%
+  \or%
+  \bibstring{\thefield{editortype}scn}%
+  \or%
+  \addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}%
+  \fi}%
+%
+\DeclareDelimFormat{streditortype}{%
+  \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
+  \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
+  \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
+  \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}cn}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}kr}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}jp}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}%
+  \or%
+  \bibstring{\thefield{editortype}cn}%
+  \or%
+  \addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}%
+  \fi}%
+
 
 %=====================================================================
 %设置驱动格式
@@ -1537,13 +1727,13 @@ togl{bbx:gbstyle} or test {\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}}%
     test \ifmorenames
   }{\ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{1}%
        {\finalandcomma}%
-       {}%biblatex作者要区别单作者加等的情况，这里为符合gbt7714-2015第7.2节的要求加上了逗号。
+       {}%
 \printdelim{andothersdelim}\printdelim{strandothersdelim}%
 }{%当是译者的时候需要特殊处理：从7.2节看等，译前面加逗号，但从示例看等和译同时出现时，译前的逗号没有，比如：
 %袁训来, 陈哲, 肖书海, 等.
 %胡泳, 范海燕, 译.
 %潘惠霞, 魏婧, 杨艳, 等译.
-\ifcurrentname{translator}{\addcomma}{}%
+\ifcurrentname{translator}{\addcomma\addthinspace}{}%为了实现上述第二个示例情况做的处理
 }}%
 %
 %   修改省略作者后的本地化字符串，比如et al.
@@ -1554,8 +1744,6 @@ togl{bbx:gbstyle} or test {\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}}%
 %   首先设置全局的，然后设置文献表中的，这一等价于将所有的cite命令环境都设置过了
 %   而不用对每一个引用命令单独设置，比如cite，parancite，textcite都设置
 \DeclareDelimFormat{strandothersdelim}{%
-  \ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{2}{\finalandcomma}{}%
-  \addspace%
   \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
   \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}%
   \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
@@ -1564,7 +1752,7 @@ togl{bbx:gbstyle} or test {\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}}%
   \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andotherscn}}{}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andotherskr}}{}%
-    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japnese}{\bibstring{andothersjp}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andothersjp}}{}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%
@@ -1592,7 +1780,7 @@ togl{bbx:gbstyle} or test {\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}}%
   \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andcn}}{}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andkr}}{}%
-    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japnese}{\bibstring{andjp}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andjp}}{}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
     \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
@@ -1895,33 +2083,38 @@ incollection,proceedings,inproceedings]{number}{%
 %
 \renewbibmacro*{note+pages}{%源来自standard.bbx
   %\printfield{note}%不要note，note用来判断是否是报纸newspaper
-  \iffieldundef{pages}{}{
+  \iffieldundef{pages}{}{%
   \setunit{\bibpagespunct}%
   \printfield{pages}}%
   %\newunit
   }%
 %
 %   编者的符号修改一下
+%   v1.0 2016-07-01
+%   v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz 修改editortype前的标点
 %
 \renewbibmacro*{editor}{%源来自biblatex.DEF
-  \ifboolexpr{
+  \ifboolexpr{%
     test \ifuseeditor
     and
-    not test {\ifnameundef{editor}}
-  }
+    not test {\ifnameundef{editor}}%
+  }%
     {\printnames{editor}%
     \iffieldundef{editortype}%增加一个类型判断，用于存在editortype的情况
     {\setunit\addspace}%当没有editortype时，直接用句点
-    {\setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+    {%\setunit{\addcomma\space}%
      \usebibmacro{editorstrg}}%
-     \clearname{editor}}
+     %\clearname{editor}
+     }%
     {}}%
 %
 %   编者类型做一修改
+%   v1.0 2016-07-01
+%   v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz 修改editortype不同语言的不同本地化字符串
 %
 \renewbibmacro*{editorstrg}{%源来自biblatex.DEF
   \printtext[editortype]{%
-    \iffieldundef{editortype}
+    \iffieldundef{editortype}%
       {%
 %      \ifboolexpr{ %这一段去掉，未定义编者类型情况下不处理
 %         test {\ifnumgreater{\value{editor}}{1}}
@@ -1930,18 +2123,34 @@ incollection,proceedings,inproceedings]{number}{%
 %       }
 %         {\bibstring{editors}}
 %         {\bibstring{editor}}
-         }
-      {\ifbibxstring{\thefield{editortype}} %定义编者类型情况下处理，以后根据需要修改
-         {\ifboolexpr{
-            test {\ifnumgreater{\value{editor}}{1}}
+         }%
+      {\ifbibxstring{\thefield{editortype}}%定义编者类型情况下处理，以后根据需要修改
+         {\ifboolexpr{%
+            test {\ifnumgreater{\value{editor}}{1}}%
             or
-            test {\ifandothers{editor}}
-          }
-            {\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}
-            {\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}}
+            test {\ifandothers{editor}}%
+          }%
+            {\printdelim{streditortypes}}%
+            {\printdelim{streditortype}}}%
          {\thefield{editortype}}}%
          }}%
 %
+%   bookauthor域的输出，
+%   v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz
+% 不再对editor和bookauthor做sourcemap，而是下面的宏内逻辑代替，
+% 使得除使用bookauthor外也可以使用editor，便于在使用editor时使用editortype
+\renewbibmacro*{bybookauthor}{%
+    \ifnameundef{bookauthor}%
+        {\ifnameundef{editor}%
+            {}%
+            {\ifnamesequal{author}{editor}%
+                {}{\usebibmacro{editor}}}%
+        }%
+        {\ifnamesequal{author}{bookauthor}%
+            {}{\printnames{bookauthor}}%
+        }%
+}%
+%
 %   修改期刊的标题
 %
 \renewbibmacro*{periodical}{%源来自biblatex.DEF
@@ -2002,11 +2211,25 @@ incollection,proceedings,inproceedings]{number}{%
 %
 %   修改in:用于inbook、incollection、inproceedings等类型
 %   2018.04.20,v1.0k,renewed marco，by hzz
+%   20190212,v1.0q,增加中英文区分，by hzz
 %
 %   原理方法:使用bibmacro{in:}改变了以前在driver中直接输出//的方式，同时也简化了标点控制。
 \renewbibmacro*{in:}{%
  \iftoggle{bbx:gbpunctin}{\printtext{\texttt{//}\allowbreak}}%\addthinspace
-                         {\setunit{\adddot\addspace}\printtext{\bibstring{in}}}}%\newunit\newblock\intitlepunct
+                         {\setunit{\adddot\addspace}%
+                         \iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}%
+                         {\printtext{\bibstring{incn}}}%
+                         {\printtext{\bibstring{in}}}%
+                         }}%\newunit\newblock\intitlepunct
+%
+%   修改type域的输出格式
+%   2019.02.12，v1.0q，byhzz
+%    使其可以区分中英文输出不同的格式，比如博士论文英文输出PHD thesis，中文则是博士学位论文
+\DeclareFieldFormat{type}%
+{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}%
+    {\ifbibxstring{##1cn}{\bibxstring{##1cn}}{##1}}%
+    {\ifbibstring{##1}{\bibstring{##1}}{##1}}%
+}%
 %
 %   book条目类的驱动
 %
@@ -2296,8 +2519,9 @@ test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{
   \newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%增加的译者信息
   \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype}{%
   \printfield{type}%
-  \setunit*{\addspace}%
+  \setunit*{\addspace}}{}%
   \printfield{number}%
   \newunit\newblock
   \printfield{version}%
@@ -2380,7 +2604,9 @@ test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{
 \usebibmacro{in:}%
 %\printtext{\texttt{//}\addthinspace}%
   \usebibmacro{bybookauthor}%
-  \ifnameundef{bookauthor}{}{\newunit}%替换下一句
+  \ifnameundef{bookauthor}{%
+  \ifnameundef{editor}{}{\newunit}%
+  }{\newunit}%替换下一句
   %\newunit\newblock
   \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}%
   \setunit{\addcolon}\printfield{volume}\printfield{number}%增加卷和册信息
@@ -2427,3 +2653,4 @@ test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{
 
 \AtEveryBibitem{\localsetchinesecode}%
 \AtEveryCite{\localsetchinesecode}%
+\AtEveryLositem{\localsetchinesecode}%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015ms.cbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015ms.cbx
index ffdfccf7e42..361f9d73a31 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015ms.cbx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015ms.cbx
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
 %% Released under the LaTeX Project Public License v1.3c or later
 %% ---------------------------------------------------------------
 %%
-\def\versionofgbtstyle{2019/02/11 v1.0q}
+\def\versionofgbtstyle{2019/03/28 v1.0r}
 \ProvidesFile{gb7714-2015.cbx}[\versionofgbtstyle biblatex citation style]
 
 %
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015mx.bbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015mx.bbx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..7b043ea65b6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015mx.bbx
@@ -0,0 +1,3247 @@
+%%
+%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
+%% biblatex-gb7714-2015 --- A biblatex implementation of the
+%% GBT7714-2015  bibliography style,numerical sequence and authoryear mixed style
+%% Maintained by huzhenzhen
+%% E-mail: hzzmail@163.com
+%% Released under the LaTeX Project Public License v1.3c or later
+%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+
+%
+%   版本和时间信息
+%
+\def\versionofgbtstyle{2019/03/28 v1.0r}
+\def\versionofbiblatex{\abx@version}
+\ProvidesFile{gb7714-2015mx.bbx}[\versionofgbtstyle biblatex bibliography style]
+%\RequireBiber[3]%显式指定用biber后端，当用bibtex时会报错，但其实不会影响编译，只是采用bibtex后无法达成格式需求
+
+%=====================================================================
+%   加载标准样式
+%=====================================================================
+\RequireBibliographyStyle{numeric-comp}
+\RequirePackage{xstring}%解决texlive2015的biblatex3.0不加载xstring包的问题
+
+
+%=====================================================================
+%   功能函数
+%=====================================================================
+    %
+    %   biblatex版本判断
+    %   20180629，v1.0k，hzz
+    %
+    %   原理方法:适用于3.10以上版本的biblatex，否则给出警告
+    \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2017/12/28}{}{
+        \blx@warning@noline{%
+           biblatex version is too old for this style\MessageBreak
+           if errors raised，Please update biblatex to the latest version.}
+    }
+
+    %
+    %   判断CJK字符的函数，用于判断作者等信息是否由中文字符构成
+    %   v1.0k,20180509,hzz
+    %
+    %   原理方法:用biber中的perl方法代替。因为利用tex函数对字符判断时，当字符在宏
+    %   中时，基于`的方法无法解决GBK编码的问题，基于CJKsymbol的方法无法解决utf-8
+    %   编码用xelatex编译的问题。
+    %
+    %   原理是：利用perl正则将中文标识记录到域中，
+    %           然后利用\iffieldundef和\iffieldequalstr进行判断
+    \providetoggle{ifCJKforgbt}
+    \def\testCJKfirst#1{%
+        \iffieldundef{#1}{\togglefalse{ifCJKforgbt}}{%
+        \iffieldequalstr{#1}{chinese}{\toggletrue{ifCJKforgbt}}{\togglefalse{ifCJKforgbt}}}}
+
+    %
+    %   2个卷的解析函数，用于连续出版物
+    %
+    %   原理方法: 范围起止间隔符号还是用-，而不是与date相同的/，因为有合期期刊的问题，需要用到/符号
+    \newcommand{\multivolparser}[1]{%
+        \IfSubStr{#1}{-}%
+            {\StrBefore{#1}{-}[\multivolfirst]\StrBehind{#1}{-}[\multivolsecond]}%
+            {\def\multivolfirst{#1}\def\multivolsecond{}}%
+    }
+
+
+    %
+    %   2个期的解析函数，用于连续出版物
+    %
+    \newcommand{\multinumberparser}[1]{%
+        \IfSubStr{#1}{-}%
+            {\StrBefore{#1}{-}[\multinumberfirst]\StrBehind{#1}{-}[\multinumbersecond]}%
+            {\def\multinumberfirst{#1}\def\multinumbersecond{}}%
+    }
+
+%=====================================================================
+%   数据模型定义
+%=====================================================================
+    %定义类型和载体标识，从gb内容看载体基本属于介质。
+    %为与lee zeping的bst的样式统一，使用mark和medium这两域名
+    %为单个条目的姓名格式控制增加nameformat和namefmtid两个域
+    %为缩略信息文献表增加了shortbooktitle域
+    %为多语言排序增加了lansortorder域
+    \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{mark,medium,nameformat}
+    \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=integer]{namefmtid}
+    \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{shortbooktitle}
+    \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{lansortorder}
+    %为多样式文献表增加的stylesections、styleaysection域：
+    \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=integer]{aysections}
+    \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{styleaysection}
+
+
+
+
+
+%=====================================================================
+%   设置宏包选项
+%=====================================================================
+    %
+    %   增加一个控制是否输出type域的选项
+    %   20190212,v1,0q,hzz
+    \newtoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype}
+    \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfieldtype}[false]{%biblatex低版本
+      \settoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype}{#1}}
+    \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfieldtype}
+
+    %
+    %   增加一个选项，用于控制是否实现GB/T 7714-2015标准的脚注文献表
+    %   20190203，v1.0p，hzz
+    %   原理方法:默认做patch，文献引用带圈上标数字表示，脚注中的文献用带圈非上标数字做标签
+    %   当前面的脚注中已经存在当前文献，那么当前文献内容不再输出而用同(4)这样的方式
+    %   需要注意的是由于小页环境和表格中的脚注本身的问题，可能会有一些问题
+    \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfootbib}[false]{%
+      \ifstrequal{#1}{false}{}{\execgbfootbib}}
+    \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfootbib}
+
+    %%
+    \newlength{\footbibmargin}
+    \newlength{\footbiblabelsep}
+    \setlength{\footbibmargin}{1em}%脚注的段落左侧缩进距离
+    \setlength{\footbiblabelsep}{0.5em}%脚注中标记号与脚注段落的间距
+    \def\execgbfootbib%
+    {%
+    %开启引用跟踪计数器，为使用\ifciteseen等测试命令
+    \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{citetracker=true}
+    %
+    %利用footmisc宏包来实现脚注文献的悬挂对齐
+    \AtEndPreamble{
+    \@ifclassloaded{beamer}{}{
+    %beamer类因为其特殊性，为避免冲突不调footmisc。
+    %同时footmisc与hyperref宏包也不兼容，所以使用footmisc时会破坏脚注的超链接
+    %如果要实现超链接可以将下句注释掉，这里留着主要是实现悬挂对齐。
+    %\PassOptionsToPackage{perpage,hang}{footmisc}%
+    %\RequirePackage{footmisc}%
+
+    %重新实现脚注的根据单页重设脚注号码
+    %重新实现脚注的悬挂对齐问题，不再使用footmisc，直接从latex核心代码和hyperref代码进行修改
+    %v1.0q 20190317 hzz
+    \@addtoreset{footnote}{page}%重设计数器
+
+    \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{%加载hyperref则对\H@@footnotetext做重定义
+    \long\def\H@@footnotetext##1{\insert\footins{%
+    \reset@font\footnotesize
+    \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+    \splittopskip\footnotesep
+    \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM
+    \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
+    \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+       \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark
+    }%
+    \color@begingroup
+    \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进
+      \@makefntext{%
+        \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox%
+        }%
+    \color@endgroup}}%
+
+  \long\def\H@@mpfootnotetext##1{%
+  \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
+    \unvbox\@mpfootins
+    \reset@font\footnotesize
+    \hsize\columnwidth
+    \@parboxrestore
+    \protected@edef\@currentlabel
+         {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
+    \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进
+    \color@begingroup
+      \@makefntext{%
+        \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
+    \color@endgroup}}
+    }{%否则对latex核心代码中的\@footnotetext做重定义
+    \long\def\@footnotetext##1{\insert\footins{%
+    \reset@font\footnotesize
+    \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+    \splittopskip\footnotesep
+    \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM
+    \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
+    \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
+       \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark
+    }%
+    \color@begingroup
+    \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进
+      \@makefntext{%
+        \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox%
+        }%
+    \color@endgroup}}%
+
+    \long\def\@mpfootnotetext##1{%
+    \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
+    \unvbox\@mpfootins
+    \reset@font\footnotesize
+    \hsize\columnwidth
+    \@parboxrestore
+    \protected@edef\@currentlabel
+         {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
+    \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进
+    \color@begingroup
+      \@makefntext{%
+        \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
+    \color@endgroup}}
+    }
+
+    \long\def\@makefntext##1{%增加了脚注标记与正文的间隔
+    \parindent 1em\noindent \hb@xt@ 0em{\hss \@makefnmark\makebox[\footbiblabelsep]{}}##1}
+
+    }
+
+    %
+    %使脚注标记加圈并设置数字的字体为tiny，不使用修改thefootnote的方式
+    \def\@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{\textcircled{\tiny\@thefnmark}}}}
+    %做patch使得脚注内容中的脚注数字标签不上标
+    \pretocmd{\@makefntext}{%
+    \def\@makefnmark{%
+    \hbox{\textcircled{\tiny\@thefnmark}}%
+    }%
+    }{}{}
+    }
+
+    %
+    %判断当前文献是否已经引用过且是做的footfullcite(即已经作为脚注输出文献内容)
+    %记录首次输出时的脚注号码，用于后面再次引用该文献时的输出，比如同(4)。
+    %v1.0q 20190309 区分使脚注标注适应minipage中的情况
+    \newbibmacro*{citesavefn}{%
+        \ifciteseen%当被引用过为true
+        {\ifcsdef{sec\arabic{refsection}et\thefield{entrykey}}%当已经定义过脚注序号信息
+            {\csgdef{labelsec\arabic{refsection}et\thefield{entrykey}}{%
+    \str@sameentry\gdef\@thefnmark{\csuse{sec\arabic{refsection}et\thefield{entrykey}}}%
+    \@makefnmark%
+            }}%
+            {\csxdef{sec\arabic{refsection}et\thefield{entrykey}}{%
+            \ifcsstring{@mpfn}{mpfootnote}{\@alph\c@mpfootnote}{\thefootnote}%
+            }}%
+        }%
+        {\csxdef{sec\arabic{refsection}et\thefield{entrykey}}{%
+        \ifcsstring{@mpfn}{mpfootnote}{\@alph\c@mpfootnote}{\thefootnote}%
+        %判断在minipage中比较麻烦，这里使用\@mpfn的定义进行判断
+        }}%
+    }
+
+    %
+    %重定义\footfullcite使完成gb7714-2015的脚注文献要求
+    \DeclareCiteCommand{\footfullcite}[\mkbibfootnote]%
+      {\defcounter{maxnames}{\blx@maxbibnames}%局部定义maxnames和minnames计数器
+       \defcounter{minnames}{\blx@minbibnames}%使footfullcite内的作者输出与正文文献表中的一致。
+       \usebibmacro{prenote}%
+        \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{%
+            \iffieldundef{postnote}%
+            {}{\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}\printtext{\thefield{postnote}}}}%由于ay样式中没有修改postnote域，此处因为格式需要不使用默认域格式
+       }%
+      {\usebibmacro{citesavefn}%
+          \ifcsdef{labelsec\arabic{refsection}et\thefield{entrykey}}%
+          {\csuse{labelsec\arabic{refsection}et\thefield{entrykey}}}%\nopunct
+          {\usedriver{\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}{\thefield{entrytype}}}%
+      }%
+      {\multicitedelim}%
+      {\usebibmacro{postnote}}
+
+    }
+
+    %
+    %   增加一个选项，用于控制gb7714的使用范围，即英文文献和中文文献使用不同的样式
+    %   20180814，v1.0m，hzz
+    %   原理方法:
+    %   只为兼容性考虑不做任何处理
+    \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbstyle}[true]{%biblatex低版本
+      }
+
+    %
+    %   增加一个控制是否输出文献类型和载体标识的选项
+    %
+    %   原理方法:
+    %   对于biblatex3.4以上版本DeclareBibliographyOption命令中的[datatype]如果是boolean，那么是可以省略的
+    %   所以用老版本的不用[datatype]的命令可以兼容所有biblatex版本
+    \newtoggle{bbx:gbtype}
+    %\DeclareBibliographyOption[boolean]{gbtype}[true]{%biblatex高版本
+    \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbtype}[true]{%biblatex低版本
+      \settoggle{bbx:gbtype}{#1}}
+    \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbtype}
+
+    %
+    %   增加一个源文件编码选择选项，当true时可以使用GBK编码。
+    %   v1.0k, 2018.05.08, by hzz
+    %
+    % 原理方法：将需要输出的中文字符串用命令形式表示存储，采用utf8编码时采用bbx文档
+    % 内的定义即是utf8编码的中文字符串，但tex源文件是gbk编码时，利用gb7714-2015-gbk.def
+    % 文档内的gbk编码的字符串覆盖。这种覆盖只能在宏包末尾加载时成功实现，所以使用
+    % AtEndOfPackage。该解决思路源自biblatex-caspervector宏包。
+    % 另外注意：
+    % gbk编码的tex文档，利用pdflatex/latex能正确编译，利用xelatex能编译，但中文显示乱码
+    % 在源文档前面增加 XeTeX 原语：\XeTeXinputencoding "GBK" 后，显示正常
+    % utf-8编码的tex文档，利用xelatex能正确编译，而pdflatex/latex不能编译。
+    \newtoggle{bbx:codegbk}
+    \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbcodegbk}[false]{%
+        \settoggle{bbx:codegbk}{#1}}
+    \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbcodegbk}
+
+    \def\str@bibliography{参考文献}
+    \def\str@references{参考文献}
+    \def\str@bytranslator{译}
+    \def\str@andotherscn{等}
+    \def\str@backrefpage{引用页}
+    \def\str@backrefpages{引用页}
+    \def\str@noaddress{出版地不详}
+    \def\str@nopublisher{出版者不详}
+    \def\str@edition{版}
+    \def\str@volumecn{卷}
+    \def\str@numbercn{册}
+    \def\str@serialcn{第}
+    \def\str@sameentry{同}
+    \def\str@incn{见}
+    \def\str@mathesiscn{硕士学位论文}
+    \def\str@phdthesiscn{博士学位论文}
+    \def\str@editorcn{主编}
+
+    \AtEndOfPackage{%
+	\iftoggle{bbx:codegbk}{%
+		\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{texencoding = GBK}
+        \input{gb7714-2015-gbk.def}
+	}{}}
+
+    %
+    %   增加一个严格按GB/T 7714-2015给出著录格式控制域的输出的选项
+    %   v1.0k, 2018.05.08, by hzz
+    %
+    %   原理方法:
+    %   默认设置该选项为真，进而不输出GB/T 7714-2015中没有的域的信息
+    %   这样可以避免因为bib文件带有多余的域的信息的输出，比如因为bibtex样式
+    %   可能需要用于中英文判断的language域的信息。
+    \newtoggle{bbx:gbstrict}
+    \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbstrict}[true]{%
+      \settoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{#1}}
+    \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbstrict}
+
+    %
+    %   增加一个控制标题域超链接设置的选项
+    %   v1.0k, 2018.05.24, by hzz
+    %
+    %   原理方法:
+    %   利用标题域格式来实现，默认设置该选项为false，不做超链接。
+    %   设置为true，则标题设置超链接
+    \newtoggle{bbx:titlelink}
+    \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbtitlelink}[false]{%
+      \settoggle{bbx:titlelink}{#1}}
+    \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbtitlelink}
+
+    %
+    %   增加一个控制参考文献标题是否能够被ctex宏包设置的选项
+    %   v1.0l, 2018.07.02, by hzz
+    %
+    %   原理方法:
+    %   重定义biblatex的宏，去除使用本地化字符串的方式，是的可以利用ctexset进行设置
+    \newtoggle{bbx:ctexset}
+    \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbctexset}[true]{%
+      \settoggle{bbx:ctexset}{#1}}
+    \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbctexset}
+
+    \AtEndOfPackage{%
+	\iftoggle{bbx:ctexset}{%
+        \def\blx@defbibstrings#1#2{%
+          \def\do##1{\csundef{abx@lstr@##1}\csundef{abx@sstr@##1}}%
+          \abx@dostrings
+          \csuse{abx@strings@#1}%
+          \setkeys{blx@lbx}{#2}%
+          \let\do\blx@defbibstrings@i
+          \csxdef{abx@strings@#1}{\abx@dostrings}%
+        }
+	}{}}
+
+
+
+    %
+    %   增加一个恢复域格式为标准样式的控制选项
+    %   v1.0k, 2018.05.15, by hzz
+    %
+    %   原理方法:
+    %   默认设置该选项为false，采用国标要求的域格式输出相关域
+    %   当设置该选项为true时，则重新利用标准样式的域格式输出相关的域
+    \newtoggle{bbx:gbfieldstd}
+    \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfieldstd}[false]{%
+      \settoggle{bbx:gbfieldstd}{#1}%
+      \ifstrequal{#1}{false}{}{\execgbfdfmtstd}%
+      }
+    \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfieldstd}
+
+    %
+    %   增加一个出版项自动处理控制选项，当true时使用出版者不详等信息补充缺失的出版信息。
+    %
+    \newtoggle{bbx:gbpub}
+    \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbpub}[true]{%
+        %\settoggle{bbx:gbpub}{#1} %或采用下面这一句
+        \ifstrequal{#1}{false}{\togglefalse{bbx:gbpub}}{\toggletrue{bbx:gbpub}}}
+    \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbpub}
+
+    %
+    %   增加控制析出文献来源前的标点符号//输出的选项
+    %   v1.0k, 2018.04.20,added in  by hzz
+    \newtoggle{bbx:gbpunctin}
+    \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbpunctin}[true]{%
+        \settoggle{bbx:gbpunctin}{#1}}
+    \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbpunctin}
+
+
+    %
+    %   增加一个处理佚名或noauthor的控制选项
+    %
+    %   原理方法:顺序编码制中与作者年制都使用
+    \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbnoauthor}[true]{%
+      \ifstrequal{#1}{false}{}{\dealnoathor}}
+    %\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbnoauthor=true}%对于需要展开较早(展开层级优先)的选项，这一执行无效，只能用宏包加载时给出的选项。
+
+
+
+
+    %
+    %   选项设置
+    %
+    \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
+      sorting=none,
+      useprefix=true,  %名字的信息包括前缀
+      date    = year,  %日期仅写到年
+      maxbibnames     = 3,%设置名字最大数量
+      minbibnames     = 3, %设置缩减后的名字最小数量
+      maxitems     = 1,%设置列表最大数量
+      minitems     = 1, %设置缩减后的列表最小数量
+      isbn=false,
+      sortlocale=zh__pinyin,%zh__big5han,%zh__stroke,%zh__gb2312han,%zh__pinyin,
+    }
+
+    %
+    %为日期相关选项增加选项值gb7714-2015
+    %
+    \csdef{mkdaterangegb7714-2015}#1{%
+      \begingroup
+        \blx@metadateinfo{#1}%
+        \iffieldundef{#1year}
+          {}
+          {\printtext[#1date]{%
+             \blx@gbdate{#1}{}}}%
+      \endgroup}
+
+    \newrobustcmd*{\blx@gbdate}[3][]{%
+      \dateeraprintpre{#2#3year}%
+      \blx@imc@forcezerosy{\thefield{#2#3year}}\ifblank{#1}{}{\printfield{#1}}%
+        \iffieldundef{#2#3month}{}{\hyphen\blx@imc@forcezerosmdt{\thefield{#2#3month}}}%
+         \iffieldundef{#2#3day}{}{\hyphen\blx@imc@forcezerosmdt{\thefield{#2#3day}}}}
+
+
+    %为姓名格式选择增加的计数器
+    \newcounter{gbnamefmtcase}
+    \def\thegbnamefmtcase{\the\c@gbnamefmtcase}
+    %为数字标签格式选择增加的计数器/命令
+    \newcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}
+    \def\gbbiblabelopt@bracket{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\mkbibbrackets{##1}}}
+    \def\gbbiblabelopt@parens{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\mkbibparens{##1}}}
+    \def\gbbiblabelopt@dot{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{##1\adddot}}
+    \def\gbbiblabelopt@plain{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{##1}}
+    \def\gbbiblabelopt@box{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\framebox{##1}}}
+    \def\gbbiblabelopt@circle{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\textcircled{##1}}}
+    %为文献表中数字标签对齐方式选择增加的计数器/命令
+    \newcounter{gbalignlabel}
+    \def\thegbalignlabel{\the\c@gbalignlabel}
+    %为引用标签标注/文献表中本地化字符串中英文选择增加的计数器/命令
+    \newcounter{gbcitelocalcase}
+    \newcounter{gbbiblocalcase}
+    \def\thegbcitelocalcase{\the\c@gbcitelocalcase}
+    \def\thegbbiblocalcase{\the\c@gbbiblocalcase}
+
+
+    %
+    %   增加不同语言排序的切换选项，numeric样式，不使用该选项
+    %   gblanorder=chineseahead的顺序为cn，jp，kr，en，fr，ru
+    %   gblanorder=englishahead的顺序为en，fr，ru，cn，jp，kr
+    %   gblanorder=cn;en;ru;fr;jp;kr的顺序为指定的cn;en;ru;fr;jp;kr，自定义内容可以随意写以分号分隔
+    %   v1.0q，20190307，hzz
+    %
+    \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gblanorder}[chineseahead]{%
+        \ifstrequal{#1}{chineseahead}%%中文在前的顺序
+            {\gdef\lancnorder{1}\gdef\lanjporder{2}\gdef\lankrorder{3}%
+             \gdef\lanenorder{4}\gdef\lanfrorder{5}\gdef\lanruorder{6}}%
+            {%
+            \ifstrequal{#1}{englishahead}%
+                {\execlanodeah\dealsortlan}%
+                {\execlanodudf{#1}\dealsortlan}%
+            }%
+    }
+    \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gblanorder}
+
+    \def\execlanodeah{%中文在后的顺序
+        \gdef\lancnorder{4}
+        \gdef\lanjporder{5}
+        \gdef\lankrorder{6}
+        \gdef\lanenorder{1}
+        \gdef\lanfrorder{2}
+        \gdef\lanruorder{3}}
+
+    \newcounter{lanordernum}
+    \newcommand{\execlanodudf}[1]{%like：cn;en;ru;fr;jp;kr
+        \setcounter{lanordernum}{0}
+        \DeclareListParser{\parsinglanorder}{;}
+        \renewcommand*{\do}[1]{\stepcounter{lanordernum}\csxdef{lan##1order}{\thelanordernum}}
+        \parsinglanorder{#1}
+    }
+
+    %
+    %   增加本地化字符串的中英文切换选项
+    %   gbcitelocal指标注中的本地化字符串
+    %   gbbiblocal 指文献表中的本地化字符串
+    %   gblocal 指设置文献表和标注中的本地化字符串
+    %   v1.0o，20190103，hzz
+    %
+    \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbcitelocal}[gb7714-2015]{%
+        \ifstrequal{#1}{gb7714-2015}{\setcounter{gbcitelocalcase}{0}}{}%
+        \ifstrequal{#1}{chinese}{\setcounter{gbcitelocalcase}{1}}{}%
+        \ifstrequal{#1}{english}{\setcounter{gbcitelocalcase}{2}}{}%
+    }
+    \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbcitelocal}
+
+    \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbbiblocal}[gb7714-2015]{%
+        \ifstrequal{#1}{gb7714-2015}{\setcounter{gbbiblocalcase}{0}}{}%
+        \ifstrequal{#1}{chinese}{\setcounter{gbbiblocalcase}{1}}{}%
+        \ifstrequal{#1}{english}{\setcounter{gbbiblocalcase}{2}}{}%
+    }
+    \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbbiblocal}
+
+    \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gblocal}[gb7714-2015]{%
+        \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbbiblocal=#1}%
+        \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbcitelocal=#1}%
+    }
+    %\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gblocal} %默认值已经通过两个相关选项设置
+
+    %
+    %   增加序号标签格式处理选项
+    %   v1.0l，20180623，hzz
+    %
+    \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbbiblabel}[bracket]{%
+        \csuse{gbbiblabelopt@#1}
+    }
+    \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbbiblabel}
+
+    %
+    %   增加姓名大小写格式处理选项
+    %
+    \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbnamefmt}[uppercase]{%
+        \ifstrequal{#1}{uppercase}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{0}}{}%
+        \ifstrequal{#1}{lowercase}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{1}}{}%
+        \ifstrequal{#1}{givenahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{2}}{}%given-family
+        \ifstrequal{#1}{familyahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{3}}{}
+        \ifstrequal{#1}{pinyin}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{4}}{}%family-given
+        \ifstrequal{#1}{reverseorder}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{5}}{}%family-given/given-family
+    }
+    \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbnamefmt}
+
+    %
+    %   增加标签对齐选项
+    %
+    %   right是默认的右对齐，left是左对齐，gb7714-2015是项对齐方式
+    \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbalign}[right]{%
+        \ifstrequal{#1}{right}{\setcounter{gbalignlabel}{0}}{}
+        \ifstrequal{#1}{left}{\setcounter{gbalignlabel}{1}}{}
+        \ifstrequal{#1}{center}{\setcounter{gbalignlabel}{2}}{}
+        \ifstrequal{#1}{gb7714-2015}{\setaligngbstyle}{}
+    }
+
+    \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
+      giveninits=true,
+      urldate =gb7714-2015, %iso，iso8601，edtf
+      eventdate =gb7714-2015,
+      labeldateparts=true,
+    }
+
+
+%=====================================================================
+%   设置本地化字符串
+%=====================================================================
+    %
+    %   新建当地化字符串，用来记录“等”字符、“和”字符
+    %
+    \NewBibliographyString{andotherscn}
+    \NewBibliographyString{andothersincitecn}
+    \NewBibliographyString{andothersincite}
+    \NewBibliographyString{andcn}
+    \NewBibliographyString{andothersjp}
+    \NewBibliographyString{andotherskr}
+    \NewBibliographyString{andjp}
+    \NewBibliographyString{andkr}
+    \NewBibliographyString{andincitecn}
+    \NewBibliographyString{andincite}
+    \NewBibliographyString{volumecn}
+    \NewBibliographyString{numbercn}
+    \NewBibliographyString{serialcn}
+    \NewBibliographyString{incn}
+    \NewBibliographyString{mathesiscn}
+    \NewBibliographyString{phdthesiscn}
+    \NewBibliographyString{editorcn}
+    \NewBibliographyString{editorscn}
+
+
+
+    %
+    %   修改一些当地化字符串
+    %
+    %   原理方法:直接利用当地化格式english修改出一些中文的格式，具体修改内容参考english.lbx文件
+    %   当然也可以增加比如上面定义的andotherscn
+    %   注意:在lbx文件和bbx文件中定义本地字符串的不同语法，两个参数和一个参数的区别
+
+    \DefineBibliographyStrings{english}{
+        bibliography     = {\str@bibliography},
+        references       = {\str@references},
+        bytranslator= {\str@bytranslator},%\addperiod，%将trans. by 改成 译\addcomma\
+        and         = {\addcomma},%将第2和3人名间的and符号改成逗号，用\finalnamedelim命令也可以定义，参见3.9.1节
+        andcn       = {\addcomma},%and本地化字符串的中文对应词
+        andincitecn = {\addcomma},%将标注中的分开，便于与文献表中的区分
+        andincite   = {\addcomma},
+        %andothers   = {et al.},%将超过3个人名的省略，et al.改成为 等
+        andotherscn   = {\str@andotherscn},%将超过3个人名的省略，et al.改成为 等
+        andothersincitecn={\str@andotherscn},%将标注中的分开，便于与文献表中的区分
+        andothersincite={et al.},
+        backrefpage = {\str@backrefpage:},
+        backrefpages = {\str@backrefpages:},
+        in={in\intitlepunct},
+        volumecn={\str@volumecn},
+        numbercn={\str@numbercn},
+        serialcn={\str@serialcn},
+       andothersjp={他},
+       andotherskr={외},
+       andjp={和},
+       andkr={和},
+       incn={\str@incn\addcolon\addspace},
+       mathesiscn={\str@mathesiscn},
+       phdthesiscn={\str@phdthesiscn},
+       editorscn={\str@editorcn},
+       editorcn={\str@editorcn},
+}
+
+
+%=====================================================================
+%   动态数据修改
+%=====================================================================
+%
+%   各层次的数据映射和动态修改
+%
+%   原理方法:
+%   1. 进行语言包括中英文判断，并设置和记录，比如记录到userf，usere中
+%   2. 增加文献标识符如[M],[J]等，对一些容易混淆的域进行设置以增强兼容性
+%   3. \DeclareSourcemap命令对于biblatex3.11以下版本只能出现一次，3.11版开始支持多个
+%   4. \DeclarestyleSourcemap在biblatex v3.7版开始可以支持出现多次
+%   5. 把作者和译者信息准确的记录到userf，usere中，用于后面判断是否是cjk字符。
+%      注意:这里用userf，usere而不是namee，namef，是因为只有把name列表转成域，才能有效读取姓名中的字符，
+%      如果用namee，namef，name信息会自动解析，所以就不能为cjk判断提供需要的信息
+%
+%   不同的文献类型使用相同的驱动输出可以有5种方法：
+%   1. 是数据源层的映射，将其它类型转换为某一要使用驱动的类型
+%   2. 是样式层映射，也是将其它类型转换为某一要使用驱动的类型
+%   3. 是驱动层映射，也是将其它类型转换为某一要使用驱动的类型
+%   4. 定义驱动类型别名DeclareBibliographyAlias，将其它类型定义为某一要使用驱动的类型的别名
+%      驱动别名定义本质上是做了驱动层映射
+%   5. 直接定义不同的类型的驱动，但驱动内容相同。
+%
+%   关于数据映射和驱动使用的考虑如下：
+%   1. 为避免利用biber输出bib文件时的数据变动，尽量不在数据源层映射做类型转换
+%   2. 为减少代码量，尽量少做内容相同的不同类型驱动
+%   3. 因此类型相关的处理主要在样式层映射、驱动层映射、驱动别名
+%   4. 由于biblatex默认做的驱动别名处理可能增加一些信息比如masterthesis转thesis时增加的type
+%      可以在样式层映射做某些需要避免这种默认处置的转换
+%   5. 当没有避免默认行为的需求时，全部采用驱动别名的方式处理，等价于驱动层的映射
+%
+%   文献类型和驱动考虑如下：
+%   1. 连续出版物及析出文献有其特殊性，因此考虑两类periodical和article
+%      newpaper映射为article，并以note域做区分特殊处理
+%   2. 专著和专著中的析出文献是主要的类型，因此考虑book和inbook
+%      standard映射为book或inbook，并以note域做区分特殊处理
+%      collection和proceedings基本与book类似，因此做book驱动别名处理
+%      incollection和inproceedings基本与inbook类似，因此做inbook驱动别名处理
+%   3. 专利类型有其特殊性，考虑patent类型
+%   4. 电子资源类型有其特殊性，考虑online类型
+%   5. 报告类型与book有点类似，出版项处理与book一样，但有时又要有修改和更新日期
+%      因此考虑用一种类型来输出，使用report类型
+%   6. 手册/学位论文等类型与book有点类似，但对于出版项处理时，有缺省时，直接省略，
+%      同时有version和edition的区别，因此考虑用一种类型来输出，使用manual类型
+%   7. 包括报告，学位论文在内的其它所有的类型，都做一个判断，当没有出版项时，
+%      且存在网址信息时，将其转换为online类型输出，否则都做为manual类型输出。
+%  8. 备选类型misc当存在网址时直接转换为online，由于howpublished域可用于描述
+%      更多的信息，因此不存在网址时，独立做一个备选格式
+%  9. 出版项主要以如下方式处理：
+%     (a) location+institution+date 仅用于连续出版物
+%     (b)publisher+location+date 用于需要完整输出出版项的类型，比如book，collection，proceedings，in*，report
+%     (c)institution+location+date 用于出版项缺失时不输出的类型，包括manual，thesis，archive等其他类型
+%     (d)printlist{insitution} 用于电子资源，仅输出出版者或组织，为数据映射方便，本来默认的organization域转换为用insitution输出。
+%     (e) 不输出，主要用于连续出版物析出的文献
+% 10. 日期以如下方式处理：
+%     date 由于存在biblatex选项，因此通过选项控制，数据源为date解析数据或year
+%     urldate 由于存在biblatex选项，因此通过选项控制，输出到日，且用[]包围，数据源为urldate
+%     newsdate 用于公告日期，公开日期或新闻日期，输出到日，但无包围符号，数据源为date
+%     modifydate 用于更新或修改日期，输出到日，且用()包围，数据源为date或enddate或eventdate
+
+
+\DeclareSourcemap{
+\maps[datatype=bibtex]{%
+        \map{%当没有作者时将editor转成author
+        \pernottype{inbook}%因为in系列中editor可能用来表示bookauthor，所以排除
+        \pernottype{inproceedings}
+        \pernottype{incollection}
+        \pernottype{periodical}%因为peridical直接使用editor，所以排除
+        %注意notfield在低版本biblatex中没有
+        %\step[notfield=author,final]%当author不存在，将editor复制给author
+        \step[fieldsource=editor,fieldtarget=author]%并删除editor
+        }
+        \map{%当没有作者时将translator转成author
+        \pernottype{inbook}
+        \pernottype{inproceedings}
+        \pernottype{incollection}
+        %\step[notfield=author,final]%当author不存在，将translator复制给author
+        \step[fieldsource=translator,fieldtarget=author]%并删除translator
+        }
+        \map{%让address和location同步，biblatex中address是location的别名
+        %因此输出的时候只有location信息，但处理过程中是可以存在address的。
+        %\step[notfield=address,final]
+        \step[fieldsource=location,final]
+        \step[fieldset=address,origfieldval]
+        }
+        \map{%让address和location同步
+        %\step[notfield=location,final]
+        \step[fieldsource=address,final]
+        \step[fieldset=location,origfieldval]
+        }
+        \map{%处理在bib文件用mark标记文献类型标识符的情况
+            \step[fieldsource=mark,final]
+            \step[fieldset=usera, origfieldval]
+            }
+        \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为lowercase的情况
+            \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=lowercase,final]
+            \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={1}]
+            }
+        \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为givenahead的情况
+            \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=givenahead,final]
+            \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={2}]
+            }
+        \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为familyahead的情况
+            \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=familyahead,final]
+            \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={3}]
+            }
+        \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为pinyin的情况
+            \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=pinyin,final]
+            \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={4}]
+            }
+        \map{%根据article确定文献类型标识符
+            \pertype{article}
+            \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={J}]
+            }
+        \map{%根据periodical确定文献类型标识符
+            \pertype{periodical}
+            \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={J}]
+            \step[fieldsource=author] %有时会把author和editor混淆，处理后使用editor
+            \step[fieldset=editor, origfieldval]
+            \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
+            \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
+            }
+        \map{%根据增加一个新闻报纸的类型newspaper确定文献类型标识符
+            \pertype{newspaper}
+            \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={N}]
+            \step[fieldset=note, fieldvalue=news]%因为没有专门的驱动，记录note方便映射为article后判断
+            }
+        \map{%对应增加的一个数据库类型database确定文献类型标识符
+            \pertype{database}
+            \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={DB}]
+            \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
+            \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
+            }
+        \map{%对应增加的一个数据集类型dataset确定文献类型标识符
+            \pertype{dataset}
+            \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={DS}]%
+            \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
+            \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
+            }
+        \map{%对应增加的一个软件类型software确定文献类型标识符
+            \pertype{software}
+            \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={CP}]
+            \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
+            \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
+            }
+        \map{%对应增加的一个舆图类型map确定文献类型标识符
+            \pertype{map}
+            \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={CM}]%
+            \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
+            \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
+            }
+        \map{%对应增加的一个档案类型archive确定文献类型标识符
+            \pertype{archive}
+            \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={A}]
+            \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
+            \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
+            }
+        \map{%因为misc类型本身就是没有类型，而不像其它文献有明确的类型，所以
+             %当misc类型带有网址时，直接将其转换为online类型
+            \pertype{misc}
+            \step[fieldsource=url,final]
+            \step[typesource=misc,typetarget=online]
+            }
+        \map{%对应增加的一个备选类型misc确定文献类型标识符
+            \pertype{misc}
+            \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={Z}]%
+            }
+        \map{
+            \pertype{book}
+            \pertype{inbook}
+            \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={M}]
+            \step[fieldsource=version] %有时会把version和edition混淆，处理后直接用edition
+            \step[fieldset=edition, origfieldval]
+            }
+        \map{%兼容老的standard类型，确定文献类型标识符
+            \pertype{standard}
+            \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={S}]
+            \step[fieldset=note, fieldvalue=standard]%因为没有专门的驱动，记录note方便映射为book和inbook后判断
+            }
+        \map{
+            \pertype{patent}
+            \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={P}]
+            }
+        \map{
+            \pertype{inproceedings}
+            \pertype{conference}%兼容老的conference类型
+            \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={C}]
+            \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher
+            \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval]
+            }
+        \map{
+            \pertype{proceedings}
+            \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={C}]
+            \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher
+            \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval]
+            }
+        \map{
+            \pertype{incollection}
+            \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={G}]
+            \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher
+            \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval]
+            }
+        \map{
+            \pertype{collection}
+            \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={G}]
+            \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher
+            \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval]
+            }
+        \map{
+            \pertype{report}
+            \pertype{techreport}%兼容老的techreport类型
+            \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={R}]
+            \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher
+            \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval]
+            }
+        \map{
+            \pertype{thesis}
+            \pertype{mastersthesis}%兼容老的mastersthesis和phdthesis类型
+            \pertype{phdthesis}
+            \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={D}]
+            \step[fieldsource=publisher]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
+            \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
+            }
+        \map{
+            \pertype{online}
+            \pertype{electronic}%兼容老的electronic类型
+            \pertype{www}%兼容老的www类型
+            \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={EB}]
+            \step[fieldsource=publisher]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
+            \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]%因为online的出版项处理类似手册
+            \step[fieldsource=organization]%有时会把organization和institution混淆，处理后使用institution，以增强兼容性
+            \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
+            }
+        \map{
+            \pertype{manual}
+            \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={A}]
+            \step[fieldsource=edition]%有时会把version和edition混淆，处理后使用version
+            \step[fieldset=version, origfieldval]
+            \step[fieldsource=publisher]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
+            \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
+            \step[fieldsource=organization]%有时会把organization和institution混淆，处理后使用institution，以增强兼容性
+            \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
+            }
+        \map{
+            \pertype{unpublished}
+            \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={Z}]
+            }
+        \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况
+                \step[fieldsource={author}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}]
+                }%
+        \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况
+                \step[fieldsource={editor}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}]
+                }%
+        \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况
+                \step[fieldsource={translator}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}]
+                }%
+        \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况
+                \step[fieldsource={bookauthor}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}]
+                }%
+        \map{%处理一些用year表示date的情况
+             %这样处理将会设置date域，并使得labeldatesource变为空，因为date的前缀为空(如果是urldate，那么labeldatesource就是url)。
+             %同时date域会被biblatex自动解析为year，month，day，并且覆盖原来的year信息
+            \step[fieldsource=year]
+            \step[fieldset=date, origfieldval]
+            }
+        \map{%将entrykey放入keywords中用于后期使用
+            \step[fieldsource=entrykey]
+            \step[fieldset=keywords, origfieldval]
+            }
+        \map{%文献题名的中文判断，将信息保存到userd中，避免因为标签生成原因导致title域被清除而产生问题
+            \step[fieldsource=title, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]%
+            \step[fieldset=userd, fieldvalue={chinese}]
+            }
+        \map{\step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF
+            \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪
+            }
+        \map{%
+            \step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final]
+            \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语
+            }
+        \map{%
+            \step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final]
+            \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语
+            }               %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理
+        \map{%
+            \step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final]
+            \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语
+            }
+        \map{%将没有设置userd，且存在title域的默认设置为英文
+            \step[fieldsource=title,final]
+            \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={english}]
+            }
+       \map{%作者的中文判断
+	        \step[fieldsource=author, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]
+            \step[fieldset=userf, fieldvalue={chinese}]
+            }
+       \map{\step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF
+            \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪
+            }
+        \map{%
+            \step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final]
+            \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语
+            }
+        \map{%
+            \step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final]
+            \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语
+            }               %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理
+        \map{%
+            \step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final]
+            \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语
+            }
+        \map{%将没有设置userf，且存在author域的默认设置为英文
+            \step[fieldsource=author,final]
+            \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={english}]
+            }
+	   \map{%译者的中文判断
+            \step[fieldsource=translator, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]
+            \step[fieldset=usere, fieldvalue={chinese}]
+            }
+       \map{\step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF
+            \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪
+            }
+        \map{%
+            \step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final]
+            \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语
+            }
+        \map{%
+            \step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final]
+            \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语
+            }               %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理
+        \map{%
+            \step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final]
+            \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语
+            }
+        \map{%将没有设置usere，且存在translator域的默认设置为英文
+            \step[fieldsource=translator,final]
+            \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={english}]
+            }
+       \map{%编者的中文判断
+	        \step[fieldsource=editor, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]%直接匹配cjk字符，unicode编码位置从2FF0到9FA5
+            \step[fieldset=userc, fieldvalue={chinese}]
+            }
+       \map{\step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF
+            \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪
+            }
+        \map{%
+            \step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final]
+            \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语
+            }
+        \map{%
+            \step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final]
+            \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语
+            }               %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理
+        \map{%
+            \step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final]
+            \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语
+            }
+        \map{%将没有设置userc，且存在editor域的默认设置为英文
+            \step[fieldsource=editor,final]
+            \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={english}]
+            }
+        \map{%编者的中文判断
+	        \step[fieldsource=bookauthor, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]%直接匹配cjk字符，unicode编码位置从2FF0到9FA5
+            \step[fieldset=userb, fieldvalue={chinese}]
+            }
+       \map{\step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF
+            \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪
+            }
+        \map{%
+            \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final]
+            \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语
+            }
+        \map{%
+            \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final]
+            \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语
+            }               %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理
+        \map{%
+            \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final]
+            \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语
+            }
+        \map{%将没有设置userc，且存在editor域的默认设置为英文
+            \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,final]
+            \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={english}]
+            }
+        \map{\step[fieldsource=userd,final]%userd存在则用根据标题的语言设定language
+            \step[fieldset=language,origfieldval]%本身language存在则不设定
+            }
+        \map{\step[fieldsource=userf,final]%userd不存在，而userf存在则根据author的语言设定language
+            \step[fieldset=language,origfieldval]
+            }%如果没有作者和标题，那么剩下的最可能有意义的只有网址了，而网址通常是英文的，因此不用再进一步对其它域进行判断了。
+        \map{%将没有设置的language设置成en，即认为不是中文的就是英文的。
+            \step[fieldset=language,fieldvalue={english}]
+            }
+	    \map{%一条文献的语言已经设定在language域中，由于出版项相关宏中使用userd判断，
+            %所以将一条文献的主体语言设定到userd中，本身前面userd已经设定，但没有处理无标题的情况，
+            %这里的处理等价于没有标题时，利用作者的语言设定userd，再没有作者，则默认用英文设定userd
+            \step[fieldsource=language]
+            \step[fieldset=userd,origfieldval]
+            }
+        \map{%当文献给出language域时，设置文献要使用的本地化字符串的语言
+             %biblatex 3.11及以下版本仅有match是区分大小写的，而3.12版开始用matchi来区分大小，而match不区分
+            %这里为兼容3.11及以下版本，所以用一个复杂一点的正则表达式
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(e|E)(n|N)(g|G)(l|L)(i|I)(s|S)(h|H)},final]
+            \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}]
+            \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanenorder]
+            }
+        \map{
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(r|R)(u|U)(s|S)(s|S)(i|I)(a|A)(n|N)},final]
+            \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={russian}]
+            \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanruorder]
+            }
+        \map{%
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(f|F)(r|R)(e|E)(n|N)(c|C)(h|H)},final]
+            \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={french}]
+            \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanfrorder]
+            }
+        \map{%
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(c|C)(h|H)(i|I)(n|N)(e|E)(s|S)(e|E)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
+            \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}]
+            \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lancnorder]
+            }
+        \map{%
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(j|J)(a|A)(p|P)(a|A)(n|N)(e|E)(s|S)(e|E)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
+            \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}]
+            \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanjporder]
+            }
+        \map{%
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(k|K)(o|O)(r|R)(e|E)(a|A)(n|N)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
+            \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}]
+            \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lankrorder]
+            }
+}
+}
+
+
+%
+%   修改输入的参考文献数据，样式层的操作
+%
+    \DeclareStyleSourcemap{
+        \maps[datatype=bibtex]{
+            \map{%尝试未定义数据模型的standard类型映射为其他类型book或inbook，
+                 %standard类型在blx-dm中有出现，但仅定义了类型，域和约束等都没有定义
+                 %因为可能要映射两种类型，所以不能在驱动层处理，因为要做判断
+            \step[fieldsource=booktitle,final]%当存在booktitle域是映射为inbook
+            \step[typesource=standard, typetarget=inbook, final]
+            }
+            \map{%剩下的全部映射为book
+            \step[typesource=standard, typetarget=book, final]
+            }
+%            \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置
+%            \step[typesource=mastersthesis, typetarget=thesis, final]
+%            %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=mathesis]
+%            }
+%            \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置
+%            \step[typesource=phdthesis, typetarget=thesis, final]
+%            %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=phdthesis]
+%            }
+            \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置
+            \step[typesource=techreport, typetarget=report, final]
+            %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=techreport]
+            }
+            \map{%
+            \pertype{report}
+            %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
+            \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
+            \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
+            %3.7以上版本用notfield
+            %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
+            \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
+            \step[typesource=report,typetarget=online]
+            \step[fieldset=note,fieldvalue={report}]
+            }
+            \map{%
+            \pertype{thesis}
+            %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
+            \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
+            \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
+            %3.7以上版本用notfield
+            %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
+            \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
+            \step[typesource=thesis,typetarget=online]
+            }
+            \map{%
+            \pertype{manual}
+            %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
+            \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
+            \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
+            %3.7以上版本用notfield
+            %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
+            \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
+            \step[typesource=manual,typetarget=online]
+            }
+            \map{%
+            \pertype{unpublished}
+            %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
+            \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
+            \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
+            %3.7以上版本用notfield
+            %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
+            \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
+            \step[typesource=unpublished,typetarget=online]
+            }
+            \map{%
+            \pertype{database}
+            %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
+            \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
+            \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
+            %3.7以上版本用notfield
+            %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
+            \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
+            \step[typesource=databasetypetarget=online]
+            }
+            \map{%
+            \pertype{dataset}
+            %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
+            \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
+            \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
+            %3.7以上版本用notfield
+            %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
+            \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
+            \step[typesource=dataset,typetarget=online]
+            }
+            \map{%
+            \pertype{software}
+            %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
+            \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
+            \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
+            %3.7以上版本用notfield
+            %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
+            \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
+            \step[typesource=software,typetarget=online]
+            }
+            \map{%
+            \pertype{map}
+            %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
+            \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
+            \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
+            %3.7以上版本用notfield
+            %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
+            \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
+            \step[typesource=map,typetarget=online]
+            }
+            \map{%
+            \pertype{archive}
+            %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
+            \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
+            \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
+            %3.7以上版本用notfield
+            %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
+            \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
+            \step[typesource=archive,typetarget=online]
+            }
+            \map[overwrite]{%这里还必须有overwrite，注意不同版本存在差异，比如texlive2015变16后biber有变化(20161207修改正确)
+            \step[fieldsource=note, final]%将note域信息复制给keywords，用于输出时容易区分标准和报纸
+            \step[fieldset=keywords, fieldvalue={,}, append]
+            \step[fieldset=keywords, origfieldval, append]
+            }
+            \map[overwrite, foreach={title,booktitle,journaltitle,journal,publisher,address,location,institution,organization}]{
+                \step[fieldsource=\regexp{$MAPLOOP}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\#}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\#}]
+            }
+            \map[overwrite, foreach={title,booktitle,journaltitle,journal,publisher,address,location,institution,organization}]{
+                \step[fieldsource=\regexp{$MAPLOOP}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\%}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\%}]
+            }
+            \map[overwrite, foreach={title,booktitle,journaltitle,journal,publisher,%
+            address,location,institution,organization}]{
+                \step[fieldsource=\regexp{$MAPLOOP}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}]
+            }
+        }
+    }
+
+%
+%   佚名/noauthor的处理
+%
+%   原理方法:利用样式层的动态数据修改实现
+\def\dealnoathor{
+        \DeclareStyleSourcemap{
+            \maps[datatype=bibtex]{
+                \map{%默认情况下将空缺作者的中文文献设置为佚名
+                    \step[fieldsource=language,match={chinese},final]
+                    \step[fieldset=author, fieldvalue={佚名}]
+                }
+                \map{%默认情况下将空缺作者的英文文献设置为A{non}
+                    \step[fieldsource=language,match={english},final]
+                    \step[fieldset=author, fieldvalue={A{non}}]%noauthor换成Anon，同时为避免大写还加了{}
+                }
+            }
+        }
+}
+
+%
+%   不同语言分集调整的实现方式
+%
+%   原理方法:利用样式层的动态数据修改lansortorder域来实现排序
+\def\dealsortlan{
+    \DeclareStyleSourcemap{
+        \maps[datatype=bibtex]{
+        \map[overwrite]{%当文献给出language域时，设置文献要使用的本地化字符串的语言
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=english,final]
+            \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanenorder]
+            }
+        \map[overwrite]{
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=russian,final]
+            \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanruorder]
+            }
+        \map[overwrite]{%
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=french,final]
+            \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanfrorder]
+            }
+        \map[overwrite]{%
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=chinese,final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
+            \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lancnorder]
+            }
+        \map[overwrite]{%
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=japanese,final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
+            \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanjporder]
+            }
+        \map[overwrite]{%
+            \step[fieldsource=language,match=korean,final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
+            \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lankrorder]
+            }
+        }
+    }
+}
+
+
+
+
+%
+%驱动别名等价于驱动层映射
+%
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{newspaper}{article}%
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{inproceedings}{inbook}%会议论文文献类型驱动
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{conference}{inbook}%会议论文文献类型驱动
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{incollection}{inbook}%文集中析出文献类型驱动
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{collection}{book}%%文集类型驱动
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{proceedings}{book}%会议论文集文献类型驱动
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{thesis}{manual}%学位论文驱动
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{unpublished}{manual}%其它类型驱动
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{database}{manual}
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{dataset}{manual}
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{software}{manual}
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{map}{manual}
+\DeclareBibliographyAlias{archive}{manual}
+
+
+%=====================================================================
+%   设置排序格式
+%=====================================================================
+%
+%   排序格式，用降序，及userb域，针对biblatex3.8及以上版本
+%
+    \DeclareSortingTemplate{gb7714-2015}{
+      \sort{
+        \field{presort}
+      }
+      \sort[final]{
+        \field{sortkey}
+      }
+      \sort{
+    	\field{lansortorder}%language
+    	}
+      \sort{%[direction=descending]
+        \field{sortname}
+        \field{author}
+        \field{editor}
+        \field{translator}
+        \field{sorttitle}
+        \field{title}
+      }
+      \sort{
+        \field{sortyear}
+        \field{year}
+      }
+      \sort{
+        \field{sorttitle}
+        \field{title}
+      }
+      \sort{
+        \field{volume}
+        \literal{0}
+      }
+    }
+
+    %降序的nyt
+    \DeclareSortingTemplate{gbnytd}{
+      \sort{
+        \field{presort}
+      }
+      \sort[final]{
+        \field{sortkey}
+      }
+      \sort{
+    	\field{lansortorder}%language
+    	}
+      \sort[direction=descending]{%
+        \field{sortname}
+        \field{author}
+        \field{editor}
+        \field{translator}
+        \field{sorttitle}
+        \field{title}
+      }
+      \sort{
+        \field{sortyear}
+        \field{year}
+      }
+      \sort{
+        \field{sorttitle}
+        \field{title}
+      }
+      \sort{
+        \field{volume}
+        \literal{0}
+      }
+    }
+
+    %降序的ynt
+    \DeclareSortingTemplate{gbyntd}{
+      \sort{
+        \field{presort}
+      }
+      \sort[final]{
+        \field{sortkey}
+      }
+      \sort{
+    	\field{lansortorder}%language
+    	}
+      \sort[direction=descending]{
+        \field{sortyear}
+        \field{year}
+      }
+      \sort{%
+        \field{sortname}
+        \field{author}
+        \field{editor}
+        \field{translator}
+        \field{sorttitle}
+        \field{title}
+      }
+      \sort{
+        \field{sorttitle}
+        \field{title}
+      }
+      \sort{
+        \field{volume}
+        \literal{0}
+      }
+    }
+
+    %升序的ynt
+    \DeclareSortingTemplate{gbynta}{
+      \sort{
+        \field{presort}
+      }
+      \sort[final]{
+        \field{sortkey}
+      }
+      \sort{
+    	\field{lansortorder}%language
+    	}
+      \sort{%[direction=ascending]
+        \field{sortyear}
+        \field{year}
+      }
+      \sort{%
+        \field{sortname}
+        \field{author}
+        \field{editor}
+        \field{translator}
+        \field{sorttitle}
+        \field{title}
+      }
+      \sort{
+        \field{sorttitle}
+        \field{title}
+      }
+      \sort{
+        \field{volume}
+        \literal{0}
+      }
+    }
+
+%=====================================================================
+%   参考文献表环境
+%=====================================================================
+%
+%   列表格式
+%
+%   增加一个\bibitemindent尺寸用于控制list环境的itemindent
+%   v1.0l，20180615，hzz
+\setlength{\bibhang}{\biblabelsep}%
+\newlength{\bibitemindent}
+\setlength{\bibitemindent}{0pt}
+
+
+\defbibenvironment{bibliography}
+  {\list
+     {\printtext[labelnumberwidth]{%
+        \printfield{labelprefix}%
+        \printfield{labelnumber}}}
+     {\setlength{\labelwidth}{\labelnumberwidth}%
+      \setlength{\labelsep}{\biblabelsep}%
+      \setlength{\leftmargin}{\bibhang}%
+      \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelnumberwidth}%
+      \setlength{\itemindent}{\bibitemindent}%
+      \setlength{\itemsep}{\bibitemsep}%
+      \setlength{\parsep}{\bibparsep}}%
+      \renewcommand*{\makelabel}[1]{\hss##1}}
+  {\endlist}
+  {\item}
+
+%
+%   顺序编码制-标签对齐方式处理
+%
+%   原理方法:利用选项提供的计数器数值做选择
+%   左对齐，右对齐为list环境下的处理，此时list环境的\labelwidth只能设置一个，是最宽标签的宽度
+%   项对齐则是在段落环境下做的处理。
+%   左对齐时，参考文献各项内容对齐，序号标签与参考文献项内容的间距可变
+%   右对齐时，参考文献各项内容对齐，序号标签与参考文献项内容的间距相等，标签与页边距离可变
+%   项对齐时，序号标签贴在页边，序号标签与参考文献项内容的间距相等
+%   修改序号标签格式为:
+%   \DeclareFieldFormat{shorthandwidth}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}} %源来自numeric.BBX
+%   \DeclareFieldFormat{labelnumberwidth}{\ttfamily\mkbibbrackets{#1}\hfill}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{labelnumberwidth}{%
+\ifcase\value{gbalignlabel}%右对齐，整个标签为右对齐
+    \mkgbnumlabel{#1}%
+\or%左对齐，整个标签为左对齐
+    \mkgbnumlabel{#1}\hfill%
+\or%中间对齐，比如：序号数字居于[]中间
+    \hfil\mkgbnumlabel{\hfill#1\hfill}\hfil%
+\fi}
+
+%
+%   修改序号标签格式为以各条参文献为基础进行对齐的方式，即序号与条目内容间隔相等的方式。
+\def\setaligngbstyle{%
+\def\blx@bibitem##1{%
+  \blx@ifdata{##1}
+    {\begingroup
+     \blx@getdata{##1}%
+     \blx@bibcheck
+     \iftoggle{blx@skipentry}{}{%
+       \blx@setdefaultrefcontext{##1}%
+       \global\let\blx@noitem\@empty
+       \blx@setoptions@type\abx@field@entrytype
+       \blx@setoptions@entry
+       \blx@thelabelnumber
+       \addtocounter{instcount}\@ne
+       \blx@initsep
+       \blx@namesep
+       \csuse{blx@item@\blx@theenv}\relax
+%       \blx@initsep   %移动到上面去，恢复bibnamesep等的作用机制
+%       \blx@namesep
+       \csuse{blx@hook@bibitem}%
+       \blx@execute
+       \blx@initunit
+       \blx@anchor
+       \blx@beglangbib
+       \bibsentence
+       \blx@pagetracker
+       \blx@driver\abx@field@entrytype
+       \blx@postpunct
+       \blx@endlangbib}%
+     \par\endgroup}%这里增加了一个\par
+    {}}
+\newlength{\lengthid}
+\newlength{\lengthlw}
+\newcommand{\itemcmd}{%
+\settowidth{\lengthid}{\mkgbnumlabel{\printfield{labelnumber}}}
+\addtolength{\lengthid}{\biblabelsep}
+\setlength{\lengthlw}{\textwidth}
+\addtolength{\lengthlw}{-\lengthid}
+\addvspace{\bibitemsep}%恢复\bibitemsep的作用
+%\parshape 2 0em \textwidth \lengthid \lengthlw
+\hangindent\lengthid
+\mkgbnumlabel{\printfield{labelnumber}}%
+\hspace{\biblabelsep}}
+%
+%   简单的段落环境
+\defbibenvironment{bibliography}
+{\begingroup\setlength{\parindent}{0em}}
+{\endgroup}
+{\itemcmd}}
+
+
+%=====================================================================
+%   设置单元或块等的标点
+%=====================================================================
+\renewrobustcmd*{\bibinithyphendelim}{\addhighpenspace}%用于处理姓名中名部分存在-的情况，比如ZHANG Yu-xin
+\renewcommand*{\subtitlepunct}{\addcolon\addspace} %修改标题和其它标题信息间的标点，来源biblatex.def，
+%
+%   利用set实现的多语言文献不同语言间的分隔符
+%   20170411，双语之间用newline替换par，避免采用gb7714-2015的项对齐方式第二语言间分段导致没有缩进
+%
+%   原理方法:set方法可以参考3.11.5 Entry Sets，4.11.1 Entry Sets
+%   这里调整一下两种语言参考文献的间隔，源来自biblatex.def
+\renewcommand*{\entrysetpunct}{\adddot\newline\nobreak}
+\renewcommand*{\bibpagespunct}{\addcolon\addthinspace}%%页码引用格式的修改，修改为用冒号
+%\renewcommand{\relateddelim}{}%\par
+
+%=====================================================================
+%   修改域的格式，重定义域的输出宏
+%=====================================================================
+%
+%   新增文献类型标识符的格式
+%   []前的nobreak，从GB4.1节的例子看不应该加，所以去掉
+%   但因为考虑到cjk字符和[]之间可能添加空格，所以仍然加上
+%   而[]中间的内容，从4.6.2节的例子看也是可以分割的，因此内部的nobreak也可以去掉
+%
+\DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflag}{%
+\iftoggle{bbx:url}%
+    {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
+        {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}}%
+        {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}}%
+    }%
+    {\ifentrytype{online}%
+        {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}}%
+        {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}}%
+    }%
+}
+
+%
+%   新增用于报纸的文献类型标识符的格式
+%
+\DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflagn}{%用于报纸newspaper
+\iftoggle{bbx:url}%
+    {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
+        {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
+        {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}\nobreak}%
+    }%
+    {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
+}
+
+%
+%   新增用于标准的文献类型标识符的格式
+%
+\DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflags}{%用于标准standard
+\iftoggle{bbx:url}%
+    {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
+        {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
+        {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}\nobreak}%
+    }%
+    {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
+}
+
+%
+%   重设title等参考文献信息的输出格式
+%
+%   原理方法:修改来自biblatex.def文件的原格式
+\newcommand{\bibtitlefont}{}
+\newcommand{\bibauthorfont}{}
+\newcommand{\bibpubfont}{}
+
+\DeclareFieldFormat{title}{#1\adddot\addthinspace}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{journaltitle}{#1\isdot}%添加\isdot用于缩写名带点情况，将其转换为缩写点，便于标点的追踪
+\DeclareFieldFormat{issuetitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{maintitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{booktitle}{#1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat%将期刊等文献的标题中原来带的引号去掉
+  [article,patent,thesis,unpublished]
+  {title}{#1\adddot\addthinspace}%\mkbibquote{#1\isdot}
+\DeclareFieldFormat%将期刊等文献的标题中原来带的引号去掉
+  [inbook,incollection,inproceedings]
+  {title}{#1}%\nopunct\unspace
+\DeclareFieldFormat{url}{\url{#1}} %%url相关输出，url域修改如本行，源来自biblatex.def
+\def\UrlFont{\rmfamily}%设置url字体为roman字体%\ttfamily
+%\urlstyle{rm} %使用这句也一样
+\setcounter{biburlnumpenalty}{100} %让url可以在数字后断行
+\setcounter{biburlucpenalty}{100} %让url可以在大写字母后断行
+\setcounter{biburllcpenalty}{100} %让url可以在小写字母后断行
+\DeclareFieldFormat{doi}{%
+  \rmfamily{DOI}\addcolon\space
+  \ifhyperref
+    {\href{https://doi.org/#1}{\nolinkurl{#1}}}
+    {\nolinkurl{#1}}}
+%
+%   标题的字母大小写格式修改
+%
+%   注意:修改标题的字母大小写，不能用前面的title的格式而要用titlecase
+%   因为titlecase is applied to the contents of the field directly，title is not
+%\DeclareFieldFormat{titlecase}{\MakeCapital#1}%重设标题格式，将其修改为首字母大写
+\DeclareFieldFormat{titlecase}{\iftoggle{bbx:titlelink}{%
+\iffieldundef{url}{\MakeCapital#1}{%
+\href{\thefield{url}}{#1}}}{\MakeCapital#1}}%重设标题格式，将其修改为首字母大写
+\DeclareFieldFormat{pages}{#1}%去掉前面引导页码的pp.等字符，\mkpageprefix[bookpagination]{#1}
+\DefineBibliographyExtras{english}{\renewcommand*{\bibrangedash}{-}}%将页码间隔符替换会英文的短横线
+
+\def\execgbfdfmtstd{%恢复到标准样式的设置
+\DeclareFieldFormat{title}{\mkbibemph{##1}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat
+  [article,inbook,incollection,inproceedings,patent,thesis,unpublished]
+  {title}{\mkbibquote{##1\isdot}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat
+  [suppbook,suppcollection,suppperiodical]
+  {title}{##1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{journaltitle}{\mkbibemph{##1}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{issuetitle}{\mkbibemph{##1}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{maintitle}{\mkbibemph{##1}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{booktitle}{\mkbibemph{##1}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{url}{\mkbibacro{URL}\addcolon\space\url{##1}}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{titlecase}{##1}
+\DeclareFieldFormat{pages}{\mkpageprefix[bookpagination]{##1}}
+}
+
+%
+%   文献标题后的标点问题
+%   v1.0k，20180405，为texlive2017以上版本中的beamer兼容性做的处理，Hu Zhenzhen
+%
+%   原理方法:如下代码处理texlive2017以上版本中，beamer中文献的标题后出现两个点的情况:
+%   texlive2017以上的beamer中对macro{title}做了patch，正常情况下不会出现两个点的情况，但由于
+%   之前为了处理texlive2015，2016下的title格式添加了adddot，导致出现两个点的情况，而且也影响
+%   析出文献的//符号的输出，因此再次对macro{title}做patch消除beamer中做apptocmd时添加的\newunitpunct
+  {%texlive 2017对应iftlseven以上版本
+  \@ifclassloaded{beamer}{
+  \DeclareFieldFormat{title}{#1}%
+  \DeclareFieldFormat[article,patent,thesis,unpublished]{title}{#1}
+  \AtBeginDocument{%
+    \patchcmd{\abx@macro@title}{\newunitpunct}{}{}{}}}{}
+  }
+
+
+%
+%   修改译者位置格式
+%
+%   原理方法:修改来自biblatex.def文件的bytranslator+others宏的格式
+\renewbibmacro*{bytranslator+others}{%
+  \ifnameundef{translator}
+    {}
+    {%\usebibmacro{bytranslator+othersstrg}
+     %\setunit{\addspace}%
+     \printnames[bytranslator]{translator}%
+     \clearname{translator}%
+     %从macro*{bytranslator+othersstrg}%中可以看到当地化字符串格式的引用前的代码处理
+     %比如生成cotranslator等用于调用cotranslator所代表的当地化字符串
+     \usebibmacro{bytranslator+othersstrg}%“译”的位置换到下面来，即放到译者后面。
+     %\setunit{\addspace}%
+     \newunit}%
+  \usebibmacro{withothers}}
+
+
+%
+%   修改作者数量超过限定值，做省略时的处理格式
+%   v1.0,20160701,hzz
+%   v1.0O,20190103,hzz,修改利用新定义的一个分隔符strandothersdelim
+%
+%   原理方法:判断作者或译者是否中文，若中文用字符等，否则用et al. 。
+%   \printnames由start-stop控制项数，默认是1和maxnames/minnames
+\renewbibmacro*{name:andothers}{%
+  \ifboolexpr{
+    test {\ifnumequal{\value{listcount}}{\value{liststop}}}
+    and
+    test \ifmorenames
+  }{\ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{1}%注意这里试图去区分姓名总数大于1的情况，当姓名总数大于1时，最后一个姓名后面先加入一个\finalandcomma
+       {\finalandcomma}%目前国标没有这样的区分要求，如果有需要也是可以这么去做的。
+       {}%
+\printdelim{andothersdelim}\printdelim{strandothersdelim}%
+}{%当是译者的时候需要特殊处理：从7.2节看等，译前面加逗号，但从示例看等和译同时出现时，译前的逗号没有，比如：
+%袁训来, 陈哲, 肖书海, 等.
+%胡泳, 范海燕, 译.
+%潘惠霞, 魏婧, 杨艳, 等译.
+\ifcurrentname{translator}{\addcomma\addthinspace}{}%为了实现上述第二个示例情况做的处理
+}}
+
+
+%
+%   修改省略作者后的本地化字符串，比如et al.
+%   v1.0o,20190103,hzz
+%
+%   原理方法:默认情况下判断作者或译者是否中文，若中文用字符andotherscn=“等”，否则用andothers=“et al.”。
+%   非默认情况，根据选项信息，选择选择强制中文或英文
+%   首先设置全局的，然后设置文献表中的，这一等价于将所有的cite命令环境都设置过了
+%   而不用对每一个引用命令单独设置，比如cite，parancite，textcite都设置
+\DeclareDelimFormat{strandothersdelim}{%
+  \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%这里使用\iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}替代ifcurrentname因为标注中使用ifcurrentname无效
+  \iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}%
+  \iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
+  \iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}%
+  \iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
+  \ifcase\value{gbcitelocalcase}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\ifbibstring{andothersincitecn}{\bibstring{andothersincitecn}}{\bibstring{andothers}}}{}%中文已经通过english本地化字符串定义
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\ifbibstring{andotherskr}{\bibstring{andotherskr}}{\bibstring{andothers}}}{}%韩语未定义，所以与bib中一致
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\ifbibstring{andothersjp}{\bibstring{andothersjp}}{\bibstring{andothers}}}{}%日与同韩语
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\ifbibstring{andothersincite}{\bibstring{andothersincite}}{\bibstring{andothers}}}{}%英语已定义
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%法语未定义，若要定义需要针对french本地化字符串定义
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%俄语未定义，若要定义需要针对russian本地化字符串定义
+  \or%
+  \bibstring{andothersincitecn}%
+  \or%
+  \bibstring{andothersincite}%
+  \fi}
+
+
+\DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{strandothersdelim}{%
+  \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
+  \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}%
+  \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
+  \ifcurrentname{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}%
+  \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
+  \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andotherscn}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andotherskr}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andothersjp}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%
+  \or%
+  \bibstring{andotherscn}%
+  \or%
+  \bibstring{andothers}%
+  \fi}
+
+%
+%   修改最后一个作者前的字符串，比如 and
+%   v1.0o,20190103,hzz
+%
+%   原理方法:默认情况下判断作者或译者是否中文，若中文用字符andcn=“和”，否则用and=“and”。
+%   非默认情况，根据选项信息，选择选择强制中文或英文
+%   首先设置全局的，然后设置文献表中的，这一等价于将所有的cite命令环境都设置过了
+%   而不用对每一个引用命令单独设置，比如cite，parancite，textcite都设置
+\DeclareDelimFormat{finalnamedelim}{%
+  \ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{2}{\finalandcomma}{}%
+  \addspace%
+  \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
+  \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}%
+  \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
+  \ifcurrentname{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}%
+  \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
+  \ifcase\value{gbcitelocalcase}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andincitecn}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andkr}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andjp}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\bibstring{andincite}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
+\space%
+  \or%
+  \bibstring{andincitecn}\space%
+  \or%
+  \bibstring{andincite}\space%
+  \fi}
+
+\DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{finalnamedelim}{%
+  \ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{2}{\finalandcomma}{}%
+  \addspace%
+  \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
+  \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}%
+  \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
+  \ifcurrentname{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}%
+  \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
+  \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andcn}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andkr}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andjp}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
+\space%
+  \or%
+  \bibstring{andcn}\space%
+  \or%
+  \bibstring{and}\space%
+  \fi}
+
+
+%
+%   重设title的输出
+%
+%   20180425，v1.0k，为标题增加字体控制命令，Hu Zhenzhen
+%   原理方法:将文献类型标识符输出出去，原输出来自biblatex.def文件
+%   利用toggle做标识符是否输出的判断
+\renewbibmacro*{title}{%
+  \ifboolexpr{%
+    test{\iffieldundef{title}}%
+    and
+    test{\iffieldundef{subtitle}}%
+  }%
+    {}%
+    {\printtext[title]{\bibtitlefont%增加字体控制命令
+       \printfield[titlecase]{title}%
+       \ifboolexpr{test {\iffieldundef{subtitle}}}%这里增加了对子标题的判断，解决不判断多一个点的问题
+       {}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
+       \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}%
+       \iffieldundef{titleaddon}{}%判断一下titleaddon，否则直接加可能多一个空格
+        {\setunit{\subtitlepunct}\printfield{titleaddon}}%
+        \iftoggle{bbx:gbtype}{%
+         \iffieldundef{note}{\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}%在标题后直接给出文献标识字母，判断一下，是否是报纸和标准
+        {\iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{\printfield[gbtypeflags]{usera}}%判断是否为标准
+                                         {\iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{\printfield[gbtypeflagn]{usera}}%判断是否为报纸
+                                                                      {\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}}%其它
+        }}{}%
+     %\iffieldundef{booktitle}{\newunit}{}%当title是析出时，不要标点
+     %\newunit
+}%
+}}
+
+%
+%   作者信息的输出格式
+%
+%   20180425，v1.0k，为作者增加字体控制命令，Hu Zhenzhen
+%   20180603，v1.0l，增加使用nameformat域来选择姓名格式
+\DeclareNameFormat{namefmtselected}{%
+\iffieldundef{namefmtid}{}%
+{\defcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{\thefield{namefmtid}}}%
+\ifcase\value{gbnamefmtcase}%
+  \ifgiveninits
+    {\usebibmacro{name:gbuppercase}
+      {\namepartfamily}
+      {\namepartgiveni}
+      {\namepartprefix}
+      {\namepartsuffix}}
+    {\usebibmacro{name:gbuppercase}
+      {\namepartfamily}
+      {\namepartgiven}
+      {\namepartprefix}
+      {\namepartsuffix}}%
+\or
+  \ifgiveninits
+    {\usebibmacro{name:gblowercase}
+      {\namepartfamily}
+      {\namepartgiveni}
+      {\namepartprefix}
+      {\namepartsuffix}}
+    {\usebibmacro{name:gblowercase}
+      {\namepartfamily}
+      {\namepartgiven}
+      {\namepartprefix}
+      {\namepartsuffix}}%
+\or
+  \ifgiveninits
+    {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}
+      {\namepartfamily}
+      {\namepartgiveni}
+      {\namepartprefix}
+      {\namepartsuffix}}
+    {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}
+      {\namepartfamily}
+      {\namepartgiven}
+      {\namepartprefix}
+      {\namepartsuffix}}%
+\or
+    \ifgiveninits
+       {\usebibmacro{name:family-given}
+         {\namepartfamily}
+         {\namepartgiveni}
+         {\namepartprefix}
+         {\namepartsuffix}}
+       {\usebibmacro{name:family-given}
+         {\namepartfamily}
+         {\namepartgiven}
+         {\namepartprefix}
+         {\namepartsuffix}}%
+\or
+\usebibmacro{name:gbpinyin}
+      {\namepartfamily}
+      {\namepartgiven}
+      {\namepartprefix}
+      {\namepartsuffix}%
+\or
+  \ifnumequal{\value{listcount}}{1}
+    {\ifgiveninits
+       {\usebibmacro{name:family-given}
+         {\namepartfamily}
+         {\namepartgiveni}
+         {\namepartprefix}
+         {\namepartsuffix}}
+       {\usebibmacro{name:family-given}
+         {\namepartfamily}
+         {\namepartgiven}
+         {\namepartprefix}
+         {\namepartsuffix}}%
+     \ifboolexpe{%
+       test {\ifdefvoid\namepartgiven}
+       and
+       test {\ifdefvoid\namepartprefix}}
+       {}
+       {\usebibmacro{name:revsdelim}}}
+    {\ifgiveninits
+       {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}
+         {\namepartfamily}
+         {\namepartgiveni}
+         {\namepartprefix}
+         {\namepartsuffix}}
+       {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}
+         {\namepartfamily}
+         {\namepartgiven}
+         {\namepartprefix}
+         {\namepartsuffix}}}%
+\fi
+  \usebibmacro{name:andothers}}
+
+\DeclareNameAlias{default}{namefmtselected}%姓名的默认格式采用可选的模式
+\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}% Used in the bibliography %family-given/given-family
+\DeclareNameAlias{citename}{default}% Default used by \citename
+
+\DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{andothersdelim}{\addcomma\addspace}
+%\DeclareDelimFormat[textcite]{andothersdelim}{\addspace}%
+
+%GB/T 7714-2015 风格，全部大写
+\newbibmacro*{name:gbuppercase}[4]{\bibauthorfont%
+\renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉
+\renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%
+  \ifuseprefix%
+    {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}%
+     \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}%
+     \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{%
+       \ifcapital%
+         {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot}%
+         {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}%
+       \ifprefchar{}{\bibnamedelimc}}%
+     \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot%
+     \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{\MakeUppercase{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital
+     \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\addcomma\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%后缀前加逗号
+    {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}%
+     \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}%
+     \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot%
+     \ifboolexpe{%
+       test {\ifdefvoid{#2}}
+       and
+       test {\ifdefvoid{#3}}}
+       {}{\revsdnamepunct}%
+     \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{\MakeUppercase{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital
+     \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}%
+     \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\addcomma\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%%后缀前加逗号
+}
+
+%GB/T 7714-2015 风格，大小写不变，根据bib文件内输入原样输出
+\newbibmacro*{name:gblowercase}[4]{\bibauthorfont%
+    \renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉
+    \renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def
+  \ifuseprefix
+    {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}%
+     \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}%
+     \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{%
+       \ifcapital
+         {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot}
+         {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}%
+       \ifprefchar{}{\bibnamedelimc}}%
+     \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{{#1}}}\isdot%
+     \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital
+     \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\addcomma\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%后缀前加逗号
+    {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}%
+     \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}%
+     \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{{#1}}}\isdot%
+     \ifboolexpe{%
+       test {\ifdefvoid{#2}}
+       and
+       test {\ifdefvoid{#3}}}
+       {}{\revsdnamepunct}%
+     \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital
+     \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}
+     \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\addcomma\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%%后缀前加逗号
+}
+
+%中文常见风格，汉语拼音全拼模式
+\newbibmacro*{name:gbpinyin}[4]{\bibauthorfont%
+\renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉，%来源biblatex2.STY
+\renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def
+\renewrobustcmd*{\bibnamedelima}{\mbox{-}}%
+  \ifuseprefix
+    {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}%
+     \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}%
+     \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{%
+       \ifcapital
+         {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot}
+         {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}%
+       \ifprefchar{}{\bibnamedelimc}}%
+     \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot%
+     \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\MakeSentenceCase{\mkbibnamegiven{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital
+     \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}
+    {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}%
+     \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}%
+     \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot%
+     \ifboolexpe{%
+       test {\ifdefvoid{#2}}
+       and
+       test {\ifdefvoid{#3}}}
+       {}
+       {\revsdnamepunct}%
+     \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{\MakeCapital{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital
+     \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}
+     \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%
+}
+
+
+%
+%   url和url日期格式
+%
+\renewbibmacro*{url+urldate}{%
+  %\usebibmacro{url}%%更换url的位置，放到下面
+  \iffieldundef{urlyear}%
+    {}{%\setunit*{\addspace}%
+    \usebibmacro{urldate}}%
+     \setunit{\addperiod\addspace}%
+     \usebibmacro{url}}
+\renewbibmacro*{url}{\printfield{url}}
+
+
+%
+%   日期信息的输出格式，针对biblatex>=3.10版本
+%
+    \DeclareFieldFormat{urldate}{#1}
+    \renewbibmacro*{urldate}{%
+    \addthinspace\printtext{[}\printurldate\printtext{]}}%能用高层命令+选项尽量用命令(比如这里的\printurldate)，而不用\blx@edtfdate这种更底层的命令
+
+    %
+    %   专利的公告日期、或报纸的日期的输出宏
+    %   20160701，v1.0，新增加
+    %   20180405，为biblatexv3.10版本，出现多出点bug做处理，Hu Zhenzhen
+    %
+    %   原理方法:加上printtext避免破坏异步标点机制
+    %   本可以用\printdate，但由于date选项设置为year，所以仅会给出年份
+    %   所以无法再用选项设置的方法，印象需要用底层的命令
+    %   这里可以用\blx@isodate，但用\blx@gbdate试图避免版本判断
+    \newbibmacro*{newsdate}{%%
+    \printtext{\blx@gbdate{}{}}%%\blx@isodate{}{}%
+    }
+
+    %
+    \newbibmacro*{modifydate}{%新增加一个带括号的日期，用于表示电子资源的更新和修改日期，而公告日期则按日期格式
+        \ifboolexpr{%
+        test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{eventday}}%
+        }%
+        {}%更新或修改日期通常有day信息
+        {\iffieldundef{year}{%
+                \iffieldundef{endyear}{\iffieldundef{eventyear}{}{\printtext{(}\printeventdate\printtext{)}}}%
+                {\printtext{(}\printenddate\printtext{)}}%
+        }{\iffieldequalstr{year}{}{%因为year存在，但为空
+            }{\printtext{(}\blx@gbdate{}{}\printtext{)}}%
+         }%
+    }}%
+
+
+%
+%   biblatex>v3.8版利用related实现双语文献的处理
+%
+    %为了实现v3.8以上版本的双语文献，采用related的方法代替set方法，因为set方法已经无法实现了，
+    %因为set不再复制其第一个成员的信息。于是定义一个命令，用于动态的修改数据，即添加related域的信息
+    %其中使用了\DeclareStyleSourcemap，但由于其只能出现在导言区中，因此\defdoublelangentry命令也只能出现在导言区中
+    \newcommand{\defdoublelangentry}[2]{%
+    \edef\entrykeya{##1}
+    \edef\entrykeyb{##2}
+        \DeclareStyleSourcemap{
+          \maps[datatype=bibtex]{
+            \map{
+              \step[fieldsource=entrykey, match=\entrykeya, final]
+              \step[fieldset=related, fieldvalue=\entrykeyb]
+            }
+          }
+       }
+    }
+
+%
+%   关联文献间的分隔符
+%
+\renewcommand{\relateddelim}{\adddot\newline\nobreak}%\par，而作者年样式不需要修改，因为没有项对齐的标签问题
+
+%
+%   关联文献块前的分隔符，针对biblatex>=3.11
+%
+%   原理方法:因为增加了begrelateddelim钩子，所以不需要重定义related输出宏
+\renewcommand{\begrelateddelim}{\adddot\newline\nobreak}
+
+
+%
+%   调整doi+eprint+url格式
+%
+%   原理方法:源来自standard.bbx，因为页码后面直接跟引用日期，没有标点所以去掉其中的标点。
+\renewbibmacro*{doi+eprint+url}{%
+%  \iftoggle{bbx:doi}%把doi的位置放到url后面
+%    {\printfield{doi}}
+%    {}%
+  %\newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:eprint}
+    {\usebibmacro{eprint}}
+    {}%
+  %\newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:url}
+    {\usebibmacro{url+urldate}}
+    {}
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:doi}
+    {\printfield{doi}}
+    {}}
+
+%
+%   调整页码的格式，即chapter+pages格式
+%
+\renewbibmacro*{chapter+pages}{%
+\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
+  \printfield{chapter}}%
+  \iffieldundef{pages}{}{%这里增加一个判断，当没有页码时就不输出
+  \setunit{\bibpagespunct}%
+  \printfield{pages}}%
+  %\newunit %这里的标点去掉
+}
+
+%
+% 当location等出版项超过maxitem缩减后不再输出etal
+%
+\DeclareListFormat{location}{%
+  \usebibmacro{list:delim}{#1}%
+  #1\isdot}
+\DeclareListAlias{institution}{location}
+\DeclareListAlias{publisher}{location}
+
+%   新增一个样式用于输出连续出版物的地址，单位，时间，
+%   用于periodical连续出版物的出版社和地址的处理
+%
+%   v1.0k，20180425，为出版信息增加字体控制命令，hzz
+%   %类似\newbibmacro*{publisher+location+date}
+\newbibmacro*{location+institution+date}{\bibpubfont%
+\iftoggle{bbx:gbpub}%
+{\testCJKfirst{userd}%
+\ifboolexpr{%
+test {\iflistundef{location}} and test {\iflistundef{institution}}%
+}{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress}\space :\space\str@nopublisher]}%
+{\printtext{[S.l.\space :\space s.n.\adddot]}}%
+}{%
+\iflistundef{location}{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress]}}{\printtext{[S.l.\adddot]}}}%
+  {\printlist{location}}%
+\addcolon\addspace%
+\iflistundef{institution}{%
+\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@nopublisher]}}{\printtext{\mkbibbrackets{s.n.}}}}%
+{\printlist{institution}}}%
+\setunit{\addcomma\addspace}%
+  %\usebibmacro{date}%
+  \printfield{year}%
+  \bibrangedash%
+  \iffieldundef{endyear}{}{\printfield{endyear}}%
+  \newunit}%
+{\printlist{location}%
+  \iflistundef{institution}%
+    {\setunit*{\addcomma\space}}
+    {\setunit*{\addcolon\space}}%
+  \printlist{institution}%
+  \setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
+  \usebibmacro{date}%
+  \newunit}%
+}
+%
+%   通用的出版社和地址的处理
+%
+%   原理方法:当没有出版社地址时，直接判断title的信息是否是中文，若为中文，则写出版地不详，否则用英文的字符表示。
+%   事实上title对于每个文献来说是必须的，所以用它判断是最快的，而且一般标题和出版社的语言是一样的。
+%   注意标准standard类型，因为当没有出版项时直接省略，所以做特殊处理
+\renewbibmacro*{publisher+location+date}{\bibpubfont%
+\iftoggle{bbx:gbpub}%
+{\testCJKfirst{userd}%
+    \ifboolexpr{ test {\iflistundef{location}} and test {\iflistundef{publisher}} }%
+    {\iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{}{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress}\space :\space\str@nopublisher]}{\printtext{[S.l.\space :\space s.n.\adddot]}}}}%
+    {\iflistundef{location}{%\adddot
+        \iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{}%%从gbt7714-2015标准第19页看到，标准存在出版项时输出，没有时完全省略。
+        {\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress]}\addcolon\addspace}{\printtext{[S.l.\adddot]}\addcolon\addspace}}}%  \bibstring{noaddress}
+        {\printlist{location}\addcolon\addspace}%%\addcolon\addspace%
+    \iflistundef{publisher}{%
+        \iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{}%
+        {\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@nopublisher]}\setunit{\adddot\addspace}\setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}}%
+        {\printtext{\mkbibbrackets{s.n.}}\setunit{\adddot\addspace}\setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}}}}%
+        {\printlist{publisher}}}%
+\setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}%\addcomma\addspace%
+\usebibmacro{date}%%\newunit %去掉这个标点
+}%
+{\printlist{location}%
+  \iflistundef{publisher}
+    {\setunit*{\addcomma\space}}
+    {\setunit*{\addcolon\space}}%
+  \printlist{publisher}%
+  \setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
+  \usebibmacro{date}%%\newunit
+  }%
+}
+
+%
+%   修改了一个institution+location+date用于manual、report、thesis等类型
+%
+%   20180425，v1.0k，增加了字体控制命令，hzz
+%   20190105，v1.0o，加了一个编组避免\usebibmacro{date}把month和day信息去掉
+\renewbibmacro*{institution+location+date}{\bibpubfont%当没有institution时不处理。
+{\printlist{location}%%加了一个编组避免\usebibmacro{date}把month和day信息去掉
+  \iflistundef{institution}
+    {\setunit*{\addcomma\space}}
+    {\setunit*{\addcolon\space}}%
+  \printlist{institution}%
+  \setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
+  \usebibmacro{date}%
+  %\newunit
+  }}
+
+%
+%   对volume卷信息格式做出修改
+%   v1.0o,20190105,hzz
+%
+\DeclareFieldFormat{volume}{%
+\testCJKfirst{userd}%
+\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}%
+{\bibstring{serialcn}#1\bibstring{volumecn}}%
+{\bibstring{volume}~#1}%
+}% volume of a book
+\DeclareFieldFormat[article,periodical]{volume}{#1}% volume of a journal
+
+%
+%   对number册信息格式做出修改
+%   v1.0o,20190105,hzz
+%
+\DeclareFieldFormat{number}{#1}%
+\DeclareFieldFormat[book,collection,inbook,%
+incollection,proceedings,inproceedings]{number}{%
+\testCJKfirst{userd}%
+\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}%
+{\bibstring{serialcn}#1\bibstring{numbercn}}%
+{#1}%
+}%
+
+%
+%   对edition版本信息格式做出修改
+%
+\DeclareFieldFormat{edition}{%源来自biblatex.DEF
+\testCJKfirst{userd}%
+\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}%
+{\ifinteger{#1}%
+{\printtext{#1\str@edition}}%
+{#1\isdot}}%
+{\ifinteger{#1}%
+{\mkbibordedition{#1}~\bibstring{edition}}%
+{#1\isdot}}}
+
+%
+%   对version的版本信息做出修改
+%
+\DeclareFieldFormat{version}{%源来自biblatex.DEF
+\testCJKfirst{userd}%
+\ifinteger{#1}%
+{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{#1\str@edition}}%
+{\mkbibordedition{#1}~\bibstring{version}}}%
+{#1\isdot}}
+
+%
+%   修改析出文献的文集的标题与附加标题间的符号
+%
+\renewbibmacro*{booktitle}{%
+  \ifboolexpr{
+    test {\iffieldundef{booktitle}}
+    and
+    test {\iffieldundef{booksubtitle}}
+  }
+    {}
+    {\printtext[booktitle]{\bibtitlefont%
+       \printfield[titlecase]{booktitle}%
+       \setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
+       \printfield[titlecase]{booksubtitle}}%
+     \newunit%标点换成下一句
+     \setunit{\subtitlepunct}}%
+  \printfield{booktitleaddon}}
+
+
+%
+%   调整期刊名的格式
+%
+%   v1.0k,20180425,增加了字体控制命令，hzz
+\renewbibmacro*{journal+issuetitle}{\bibpubfont%源来自standard.bbx
+  \usebibmacro{journal}%
+  %\setunit*{\addspace}%
+  \setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}%修改为增加一个逗号
+  \iffieldundef{series}
+    {}
+    {\newunit
+     \printfield{series}%
+     \setunit{\addspace}}%
+  %\usebibmacro{volume+number+eid}%
+  %\setunit{\addspace}%
+  \usebibmacro{issue+date}%
+  %\setunit{\addcolon\space}%
+  \iffieldundef{volume}{}{\setunit{\addcomma\space}}%
+  %换成逗号和空格
+  \usebibmacro{issue}%
+  \usebibmacro{volume+number+eid}%把卷期放到年份后面
+  %\newunit
+  }
+
+
+
+%
+%   调整期刊卷和期的格式
+%
+\renewbibmacro*{volume+number+eid}{%源来自standard.bbx
+\iftoggle{bbx:gbfieldstd}{%
+  \printfield{volume}%
+  \setunit*{\adddot}%
+  \printfield{number}%
+  \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+  \printfield{eid}}{%
+  \printfield{volume}%
+  %\setunit*{\adddot}%去掉点号
+  %\printfield{number}%
+  \iffieldundef{number}{}{\printtext{\mkbibparens{\printfield{number}}}}%增加一个圆括号
+  \iffieldundef{eid}{}{%
+  \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+  \printfield{eid}}}}
+
+%
+%   调整期刊年份的格式
+%
+\renewbibmacro*{issue+date}{%去掉括号
+  \printtext{%去掉了[parens]
+    \iffieldundef{issue}
+      {%\usebibmacro{date}
+        \iffieldundef{note}{\usebibmacro{date}}%判断一下，是否是报纸
+        {\iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{\usebibmacro{newsdate}}%判断是否为报纸
+                                     {\usebibmacro{date}}%
+      }}%
+      {\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{\printfield{issue}%
+       \setunit*{\addspace}}%
+       %\usebibmacro{date}
+         \iffieldundef{note}{\usebibmacro{date}}%判断一下，是否是报纸
+        {\iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{\usebibmacro{newsdate}}%判断是否为报纸
+                                     {\usebibmacro{date}}%
+        }}}%
+  %\newunit
+  }
+
+%
+%   调整页码前的标点和去掉期刊文章等页码后面的标点
+%
+\renewbibmacro*{note+pages}{%源来自standard.bbx
+  %\printfield{note}%不要note，note用来判断是否是报纸newspaper
+  \iffieldundef{pages}{}{
+  \setunit{\bibpagespunct}%
+  \printfield{pages}}%
+  %\newunit
+  }
+
+
+%
+%   编者的符号修改一下
+%   v1.0 2016-07-01
+%   v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz 修改editortype前的标点
+%
+\renewbibmacro*{editor}{%源来自biblatex.DEF
+  \ifboolexpr{
+    test \ifuseeditor
+    and
+    not test {\ifnameundef{editor}}
+  }
+    {\printnames{editor}%
+    \iffieldundef{editortype}%增加一个类型判断，用于存在editortype的情况
+    {\setunit\addspace}%当没有editortype时，直接用句点
+    {%\setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+     \usebibmacro{editorstrg}}%
+     %\clearname{editor}
+     }%
+    {}}
+
+%
+%   编者类型做一修改
+%   v1.0 2016-07-01
+%   v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz 修改editortype不同语言的不同本地化字符串
+%
+\renewbibmacro*{editorstrg}{%源来自biblatex.DEF
+  \printtext[editortype]{%
+    \iffieldundef{editortype}
+      {%
+%      \ifboolexpr{ %这一段去掉，未定义编者类型情况下不处理
+%         test {\ifnumgreater{\value{editor}}{1}}
+%         or
+%         test {\ifandothers{editor}}
+%       }
+%         {\bibstring{editors}}
+%         {\bibstring{editor}}
+         }
+      {\ifbibxstring{\thefield{editortype}} %定义编者类型情况下处理，以后根据需要修改
+         {\ifboolexpr{
+            test {\ifnumgreater{\value{editor}}{1}}
+            or
+            test {\ifandothers{editor}}
+          }
+            {\printdelim{streditortypes}}
+            {\printdelim{streditortype}}}
+         {\thefield{editortype}}}%
+         }}
+
+%
+%   编者类型的本地化字符串输出
+%   v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz
+%   能对不同条目类型作格式设置的域格式，能对不同环境做格式设置的分隔符
+%   能对不同文境作设置的包括排序，标签等
+%   这里因为考虑可能标注和文献表中存在不同，所以用分隔符来输出本地化字符串
+%
+\DeclareDelimFormat{streditortypes}{%
+  \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
+  \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
+  \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
+  \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}scn}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}skr}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}sjp}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}%
+  \or%
+  \bibstring{\thefield{editortype}scn}%
+  \or%
+  \addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}%
+  \fi}
+%
+\DeclareDelimFormat{streditortype}{%
+  \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
+  \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
+  \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
+  \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}cn}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}kr}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}jp}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}%
+    \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}%
+  \or%
+  \bibstring{\thefield{editortype}cn}%
+  \or%
+  \addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}%
+  \fi}
+
+
+%
+%   bookauthor域的输出，
+%   v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz
+% 不再对editor和bookauthor做sourcemap，而是下面的宏内逻辑代替，
+% 使得除使用bookauthor外也可以使用editor，便于在使用editor时使用editortype
+\renewbibmacro*{bybookauthor}{%
+    \ifnameundef{bookauthor}%
+        {\ifnameundef{editor}%
+            {}%
+            {\ifnamesequal{author}{editor}%
+                {}{\usebibmacro{editor}}}%
+        }%
+        {\ifnamesequal{author}{bookauthor}%
+            {}{\printnames{bookauthor}}%
+        }%
+}
+
+%
+%   修改期刊的标题
+%
+\renewbibmacro*{periodical}{%源来自biblatex.DEF
+  \iffieldundef{title}
+    {}
+    {\printtext[title]{\bibtitlefont%
+       \printfield[titlecase]{title}%
+       %\setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
+       \ifboolexpr{test {\iffieldundef{subtitle}}}%这里增加了对子标题的判断，解决不判断多一个点的问题
+       {}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct}
+       \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}%
+       %{}%把编组结束移到后面去
+       \iftoggle{bbx:gbtype}{%
+       \iffieldundef{usera}{}{%在标题后直接给出文献标识字母
+        \printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}}{}
+       }}
+       }
+
+
+%
+%   期刊的标题做修改
+%
+\renewbibmacro*{title+issuetitle}{%源来自standard.BBX
+  \usebibmacro{periodical}%
+  %\setunit*{\addspace}%
+  \setunit*{\adddot\addspace}%标点修改为句点
+  \iffieldundef{series}
+    {}
+    {\newunit
+     \printfield{series}%
+     \setunit{\addspace}}%
+  \usebibmacro{periodical+issue}%将issue调整到上面来，并修改
+\iffieldundef{number}{}{%%进一步处理有范围的数字
+  \multinumberparser{\thefield{number}}}%
+  \iffieldundef{volume}%
+  {\printfield{year}%
+  \printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumberfirst}}%
+  \bibrangedash%
+  \iffieldundef{endyear}{}{\printfield{endyear}\printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumbersecond}}}%
+  }%
+  {\multivolparser{\thefield{volume}}%
+  \printfield{year}%
+  \setunit{\addcomma\space}%将冒号修改为逗号
+  \printtext{\multivolfirst}%
+  \printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumberfirst}}%
+  \bibrangedash%
+  \iffieldundef{endyear}{}{%
+  \printfield{endyear}%
+  \setunit{\addcomma\space}%将冒号修改为逗号
+  \printtext{\multivolsecond}%
+  \printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumbersecond}}}%
+  }%
+  \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+  \printfield{eid}%
+  \setunit{\addspace}%
+  %\usebibmacro{issue+date}%
+  %\setunit{\addcolon\space}%
+  \usebibmacro{issue}%
+  \newunit}
+
+%
+%   新增一个样式用于调整期刊年份的格式，只打印年份
+%
+\newbibmacro*{periodical+issue}{%
+  \printtext{%去掉了[parens]
+    \iffieldundef{issue}
+      {%\usebibmacro{date}%修改为下一句
+      }%
+      {\printfield{issue}%
+       \setunit*{\addspace}%
+       %\usebibmacro{date}%修改为下一句
+       }%
+       }%
+  %\newunit
+}
+
+%
+%   重设专利title的输出，将文献类型标识符输出出去
+%
+\newbibmacro*{patenttitle}{%原输出来自biblatex.def文件
+  \ifboolexpr{%
+    test{\iffieldundef{title}}%
+    and%
+    test{\iffieldundef{subtitle}}%
+  }%
+    {}%
+    {\printtext[title]{\bibtitlefont%
+       \printfield[titlecase]{title}%
+       \ifboolexpr{test {\iffieldundef{subtitle}}}%这里增加了对子标题的判断，解决不判断多一个点的问题
+       {}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
+       \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}%
+       \iffieldundef{titleaddon}{}%判断一下titleaddon，否则直接加可能多一个空格
+        {\setunit{\subtitlepunct}\printfield{titleaddon}}%
+        \setunit{\subtitlepunct}\printfield{number}%写专利号
+        \iftoggle{bbx:gbtype}{\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}{}%
+     %\iffieldundef{booktitle}{\newunit}{}%当title是析出时，不要标点
+     %\newunit
+     }%
+}%
+}
+
+
+
+%
+%   修改in:用于inbook、incollection、inproceedings等类型
+%   2018.04.20,v1.0k,renewed marco，by hzz
+%   20190212,v1.0q,增加中英文区分，by hzz
+%
+%   原理方法:使用bibmacro{in:}改变了以前在driver中直接输出//的方式，同时也简化了标点控制。
+\renewbibmacro*{in:}{%
+ \iftoggle{bbx:gbpunctin}{\printtext{\texttt{//}\allowbreak}}%\addthinspace
+                         {\setunit{\adddot\addspace}%
+                         \iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}%
+                         {\printtext{\bibstring{incn}}}%
+                         {\printtext{\bibstring{in}}}%
+                         }}%\newunit\newblock\intitlepunct
+
+%
+%   修改type域的输出格式
+%   2019.02.12，v1.0q，byhzz
+%    使其可以区分中英文输出不同的格式，比如博士论文英文输出PHD thesis，中文则是博士学位论文
+\DeclareFieldFormat{type}%
+{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}%
+    {\ifbibxstring{#1cn}{\bibxstring{#1cn}}{#1}}%
+    {\ifbibstring{#1}{\bibstring{#1}}{#1}}%
+}
+
+%=====================================================================
+%设置驱动格式
+%=====================================================================
+%
+%   book条目类的驱动
+%
+  \DeclareBibliographyDriver{book}{%源来自standard.bbx文件
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
+\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
+\usebibmacro{maintitle+title}%
+\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
+\newunit
+\printlist{language}%
+\newunit\newblock%
+\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+\newunit\newblock}%
+\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+\newunit
+\printfield{edition}%
+\newunit\newblock%%
+\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
+\iffieldundef{maintitle}%
+{\printfield{volume}%
+\printfield{part}}%
+{}%
+\newunit%
+\printfield{volumes}%
+\newunit\newblock%
+\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
+\newunit\newblock%
+%\printfield{note}%
+%\newunit\newblock%
+\usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+%\newunit\newblock %这里标点去掉
+\usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+  \iffieldundef{url}{}{%当没有网址时也不输出
+  \usebibmacro{modifydate}}%带括号的修改或更新日期，
+\usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%从下面移动到上面来，因为gbt2015的url需直接放在页码后面。
+  \newunit\newblock%
+  \printfield{pagetotal}%
+  \newunit\newblock%
+  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+    {\printfield{isbn}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  %\usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  %\newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:related}
+    {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
+     \usebibmacro{related}}
+    {}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+
+%
+%   期刊文章，连续出版物中的析出文献的格式
+%
+  \DeclareBibliographyDriver{article}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
+  \usebibmacro{title}%
+  \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
+  \newunit%
+  \printlist{language}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{bytranslator+others}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{version}}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  %\usebibmacro{in:}% 不使用in来表示期刊等连续出版物
+  \usebibmacro{journal+issuetitle}%
+  %\newunit
+%  \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+%  \newunit
+  \usebibmacro{note+pages}%
+  \iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{}{%当是新闻时不输出修改或更新日期
+  \iffieldundef{url}{}{%当没有网址时也不输出
+  \usebibmacro{modifydate}}}%带括号的修改或更新日期，
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%从后面移上来，调整url和页码之间的位置
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+    {\printfield{issn}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  %\usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  %\newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:related}
+    {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
+     \usebibmacro{related}}
+    {}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+
+
+%
+%   连续出版物的驱动
+%
+  \DeclareBibliographyDriver{periodical}{%源来自standard.BBX
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \usebibmacro{editor}%
+  %\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock
+  \newunit\newblock %删除上面一行，添加这一行
+  \usebibmacro{title+issuetitle}%
+  \newunit\newblock%
+  \usebibmacro{location+institution+date}%添加这一行用于输出地址，单位和时间
+  \newunit\newblock%添加这一行
+  \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
+  \printlist{language}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byeditor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \newunit\newblock}
+  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+    {\printfield{issn}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:related}
+    {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
+     \usebibmacro{related}}
+    {}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+%
+%   专利文献驱动
+%
+  \DeclareBibliographyDriver{patent}{%源来自standard.BBX
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \usebibmacro{author}%
+\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
+  %\usebibmacro{title}%
+  \usebibmacro{patenttitle}%给出专利专用的标题输出
+  \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
+  \newunit%
+  \printlist{language}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byauthor}}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{type}%
+  \setunit*{\addspace}%
+  %\printfield{number}%已放到patenttitle中处理
+  \iflistundef{location}
+    {}
+    {\setunit*{\addspace}%
+     \printtext{%[parens]
+       \printlist[][-\value{listtotal}]{location}}}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byholder}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{newsdate}%
+  %\newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:related}
+    {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
+     \usebibmacro{related}}
+    {}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+
+%
+%   在线文献驱动
+%
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{online}{%源来自standard.BBX
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
+\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
+  \usebibmacro{title}%
+  \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
+  \newunit%
+  \printlist{language}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{note}}%
+  \newunit
+  \printfield{version}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  %\printlist{organization}%
+  \printlist{institution}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+\ifboolexpr{%
+test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{eventday}}%
+}{\usebibmacro{date}}%
+{\usebibmacro{modifydate}}%修改或更新日期，为带括号的时间
+  \usebibmacro{url+urldate}%从下面移上来
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:eprint}
+    {\usebibmacro{eprint}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  %\usebibmacro{url+urldate}%
+  %\newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:related}
+    {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
+     \usebibmacro{related}}
+    {}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+
+%
+%   报告类型驱动
+%   当有网址无出版项时，用online输出
+%
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{report}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \usebibmacro{author}%
+\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
+  \usebibmacro{title}%
+  \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
+  \newunit%
+  \printlist{language}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byauthor}}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%增加的译者信息
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{type}%
+  \setunit*{\addspace}%
+  \printfield{number}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{version}%
+  \newunit
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+  %\newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit
+  \printfield{pagetotal}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+    {\printfield{isrn}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+%  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+%  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:related}
+    {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
+     \usebibmacro{related}}
+    {}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+%
+%   论文、手册类型驱动
+%   2016-11-11，增加了译者信息
+%
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{manual}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \usebibmacro{author}%
+\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
+  \usebibmacro{title}%
+  \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
+  \newunit%
+  \printlist{language}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byauthor}}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%增加的译者信息
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype}{%
+  \printfield{type}%
+  \setunit*{\addspace}}{}%
+  \printfield{number}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{version}%
+  \newunit
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{institution+location+date}%
+  %\newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+  \iffieldundef{url}{}{%当没有网址时也不输出修改或更新日期
+  \usebibmacro{modifydate}}%修改或更新日期为带括号的时间
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit
+  \printfield{pagetotal}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+    {\printfield{isrn}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+%  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+%  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:related}
+    {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
+     \usebibmacro{related}}
+    {}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+%
+%   备选类型驱动
+%
+%   利用biblatex的misc驱动
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{misc}{%
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
+\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
+  \usebibmacro{title}%
+\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
+  \newunit
+  \printlist{language}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{howpublished}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{type}%
+  \newunit
+  \printfield{version}%
+  \newunit
+  \printfield{note}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{institution+location+date}%
+  %\usebibmacro{organization+location+date}%
+  %\newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:related}
+    {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
+     \usebibmacro{related}}
+    {}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+
+%
+%   专著中的析出文献的格式修改
+%
+\DeclareBibliographyDriver{inbook}{%源来自standard.bbx
+  \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
+  \usebibmacro{begentry}%
+  \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
+\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
+\usebibmacro{title}%
+\usebibmacro{in:}%
+%\printtext{\texttt{//}\addthinspace}%
+  \usebibmacro{bybookauthor}%
+  \ifnameundef{bookauthor}{%
+  \ifnameundef{editor}{}{\newunit}%
+  }{\newunit}%替换下一句
+  %\newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}%
+  \setunit{\addcolon}\printfield{volume}\printfield{number}%增加卷和册信息
+  \newunit\newblock%
+%  \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
+%  \newunit\newblock
+  \printfield{edition}%
+  \newunit
+  \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
+%  \iffieldundef{maintitle}
+%    {\printfield{volume}%
+%     \printfield{part}}
+%    {}%
+%  \newunit
+  \printfield{volumes}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{series+number}}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  %\printfield{note}%
+  %\newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
+  %\newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
+  %\newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%移到上面来
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
+    {\printfield{isbn}}
+    {}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+%  \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
+%  \newunit\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
+  \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
+  \usebibmacro{pageref}%
+  \newunit\newblock
+  \iftoggle{bbx:related}
+    {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
+     \usebibmacro{related}}
+    {}%
+  \usebibmacro{finentry}}
+
+
+%
+%针对不同refsection做不同的格式处理的代码
+%
+
+%
+%默认采用顺序编码制，因此只需增加的是作者年制
+\newrobustcmd{\setaystylesection}[1]{\csxdef{gb@aystyle@section#1}{#1}}
+
+%
+%在AtBeginBibliography处已经无法重定义defbibenvironment{bibliographyay}
+%所以输出只能是用另外定义的环境来实现
+%可以在refsection后面做patch
+%为排序引入newrefcontext
+\apptocmd{\refsection}{
+\edef\gb@refsecnum{\number\c@refsection}%
+\ifcsdef{gb@aystyle@section\gb@refsecnum}%
+{
+\newrefcontext[sorting=gb7714-2015]
+
+\setlength{\bibhang}{1em}
+\setlength{\bibitemindent}{-\bibhang}
+\defbibenvironment{bibliography}
+      {\list
+         {}
+         {\setlength{\leftmargin}{\bibhang}%
+          \setlength{\itemindent}{\bibitemindent}%
+          \setlength{\itemsep}{\bibitemsep}%
+          \setlength{\parsep}{\bibparsep}}}
+      {\endlist}
+      {\item}
+}{}
+}{}{}
+
+%
+%为排序引入endrefcontext
+%
+\pretocmd{\endrefsection}{
+\edef\gb@refsecnum{\number\c@refsection}%
+\ifcsdef{gb@aystyle@section\gb@refsecnum}%
+{\endrefcontext}{}
+}{}{}
+
+%因为是整个文献表，在打印文献表的时候，增加钩子代码
+%因为下面的钩子是在defbibenvironment的begincode之后，所以对于defbibenvironment相关的设置都是无效的
+\AtBeginBibliography{
+
+\edef\gb@refsecnum{\number\c@refsection}%
+\ifcsdef{gb@aystyle@section\gb@refsecnum}%
+%\ifboolexpr{
+%not test {\ifcsundef{gb@aystyle@section\gb@refsecnum}}
+%and
+%test {\ifcsequal{gb@refsecnum}{gb@aystyle@section\gb@refsecnum}}
+%}
+    {
+
+    \DeclareDelimFormat{nameyeardelim}{\addcomma\space}
+    \DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{nameyeardelim}{\addcomma\space}
+
+    \renewbibmacro*{date}{%
+    \iflabeldateisdate
+      {}
+      {\printdate}}%
+
+    \renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{%
+        \iffieldundef{labelyear}
+          {}
+          {\printtext{%[parens]%这里去掉括号
+             \iflabeldateisdate
+               {\printdateextra}
+               {\printlabeldateextra}}}}%
+
+      \newbibmacro*{bbx:savehash}{%
+        \savefield{fullhash}{\bbx@lasthash}}
+
+      \newbibmacro*{bbx:dashcheck}[2]{}
+
+    %注意这里当没有作者只有标题时在年份之前的标点是否需要标准并未涉及，所以未做处理。
+    \renewbibmacro*{author}{%以前的date+extrayear变为date+extradate，所以对3.8以上版本重定义一下author
+      \ifboolexpr{
+        test \ifuseauthor
+        and
+        not test {\ifnameundef{author}}
+      }
+        {%
+        \usebibmacro{bbx:savehash}%
+            \printnames{author}%
+            \iffieldundef{authortype}
+              {\setunit{\printdelim{nameyeardelim}}}
+              {\setunit{\printdelim{authortypedelim}}}%
+         \iffieldundef{authortype}
+           {}
+           {\usebibmacro{authorstrg}%
+            \setunit{\printdelim{nameyeardelim}}}
+            }%
+        {\global\undef\bbx@lasthash
+         \usebibmacro{labeltitle}%
+         \setunit*{\printdelim{nonameyeardelim}}}%
+      \usebibmacro{date+extradate}}
+
+    \newbibmacro*{labeltitle}{%
+      \iffieldundef{label}
+        {\iffieldundef{shorttitle}
+           {\printfield{title}%
+            \clearfield{title}}
+           {\printfield[title]{shorttitle}}}
+        {\printfield{label}}}
+
+%
+%   增加一个number带括号的格式，避免使用mkbibparens而引入一个不必要的空格
+%
+\DeclareFieldFormat{addnumflag}{%
+\nobreak\printtext{(}\nobreak #1\nobreak\printtext{)}}
+
+%
+%   调整journal输出
+%
+%   原理方法:首先判断子标题，然后再设置标点。
+%   避免直接设置标点后，当volume不存在时需要使用\nopuct去标点进而引入不必要的空格
+\renewbibmacro*{journal}{%
+  \iffieldundef{journaltitle}%
+    {}%
+    {\printtext[journaltitle]{%
+       \printfield[titlecase]{journaltitle}%
+       \iffieldundef{journalsubtitle}{}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
+       \printfield[titlecase]{journalsubtitle}}}}}
+
+
+
+%
+%   调整期刊卷和期的格式
+%
+\renewbibmacro*{volume+number+eid}{%源来自standard.bbx
+\iftoggle{bbx:gbfieldstd}{%
+  \printfield{volume}%
+  \setunit*{\adddot}%
+  \printfield{number}%
+  \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+  \printfield{eid}}{%
+  \printfield{volume}%
+  %\setunit*{\adddot}%去掉点号
+  %\printfield{number}%
+  \iffieldundef{number}{}{\printfield[addnumflag]{number}}%区别于顺序编码制
+  \iffieldundef{eid}{}{%
+  \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
+  \printfield{eid}}}}
+
+%
+%   调整期刊年份的格式
+%
+%   原理方法:原在authoryear.BBX中\bbx@opt@mergedate@compact中定义
+%   当issue存在时，才设置newunit。避免直接设置标点后，当volume不存在是需要使用\nopuct去标点进而引入不必要的空格
+  \renewbibmacro*{issue+date}{%
+    \iffieldundef{issue}%
+      {}%
+      {\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{\printtext[parens]{\printfield{issue}}\newunit}}}
+
+%
+%   编者的符号修改一下
+%   v1.0 2016-07-01
+%   v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz 修改editortype前的标点
+%
+\renewbibmacro*{editor}{%
+  \ifboolexpr{
+    test \ifuseeditor
+    and
+    not test {\ifnameundef{editor}}
+  }
+    {\usebibmacro{bbx:dashcheck}
+       {%\bibnamedash
+       \printnames{editor}%
+       }
+       {\printnames{editor}%
+        %\setunit{\printdelim{editortypedelim}}%
+        %\usebibmacro{bbx:savehash}
+        }%
+     \usebibmacro{editorstrg}%
+     %\clearname{editor}%
+     \setunit{\printdelim{nameyeardelim}}}%
+    {\global\undef\bbx@lasthash
+     \usebibmacro{labeltitle}%
+     \setunit*{\printdelim{nonameyeardelim}}}%
+	 \ifboolexpr{%
+        test {\ifentrytype{inbook}}
+        or
+        test {\ifentrytype{incollection}}
+        or
+        test {\ifentrytype{inproceedings}}
+        or
+        test {\ifentrytype{conference}}
+    }%
+    {}%
+    {\usebibmacro{date+extradate}}}
+
+
+    }{}
+
+
+
+}
+
+
+
+%
+%针对具体条目做处理时的特殊处理
+%
+%\def\localsetrefsectionstyle{%
+%}
+
+%\AtEveryBibitem{\localsetrefsectionstyle}%
+%\AtEveryCite{\localsetchinesecode}%
+%\AtEveryLositem{\localsetchinesecode}%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015mx.cbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015mx.cbx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..28682a5601c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015mx.cbx
@@ -0,0 +1,367 @@
+%%
+%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
+%% biblatex-gb7714-2015 --- A biblatex implementation of the
+%% GBT7714-2015 citation style,numerical sequence
+%% Maintained by huzhenzhen
+%% E-mail: hzzmail@163.com
+%% Released under the LaTeX Project Public License v1.3c or later
+%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+\def\versionofgbtstyle{2019/03/28 v1.0r}
+\ProvidesFile{gb7714-2015mx.cbx}[\versionofgbtstyle biblatex citation style]
+
+%
+%   加载标准样式
+%
+\RequireCitationStyle{numeric-comp} %numeric
+
+
+%
+%   选项设置
+%
+\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
+  %autocite  = superscript ,
+  %autopunct = true       ,
+  %sorting   = none        ,
+  maxcitenames=1,
+  mincitenames=1,
+  uniquename=init,%因为使用了名字缩写选项，所以需要设置uniquename=init而不是full避免冲突
+  uniquelist=minyear,
+  labeldateparts,
+  sortcites,
+}
+
+
+
+%
+%   定义一个上标方括号wrapper
+%
+\newcommand*\mkbibsuperbracket[1]{%
+  \mkbibsuperscript{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}%
+}
+
+%   修改postnote的输出格式
+\DeclareFieldFormat{postnote}{#1}
+
+%
+%   重定义cite命令
+%
+%   方法:\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkbibparens]{precode}{loopcode}{sepcode}{postcode}
+%    v1.0p版后将cite的处理方式修改为类似pagescite，而不再使用biblatex的标准方式
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkbibsuperscript]%利用mkbibsuperbracket添加方括号
+  {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
+   \usebibmacro{prenote}}
+  {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+   \usebibmacro{cite:comp}}
+  {}
+  {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]%
+   \printfield{postnote}}
+%   v1.0p 以前用的方式
+%\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkbibsuperbracket]%利用mkbibsuperbracket添加方括号
+%  {\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
+%   \usebibmacro{prenote}}
+%  {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+%   \usebibmacro{cite:comp}}
+%  {}
+%  {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}%
+%   \usebibmacro{postnote}}
+
+%
+%   定义upcite命令
+%   20180604，v1.0l，hzz
+%   方法:对supercite增加[]
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\upcite}[\mkbibsuperbracket]%
+  {\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
+   \let\multicitedelim=\supercitedelim
+   \iffieldundef{prenote}
+     {}
+     {\BibliographyWarning{Ignoring prenote argument}}%
+   \iffieldundef{postnote}
+     {}
+     {\BibliographyWarning{Ignoring postnote argument}}}
+  {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+   \usebibmacro{cite:comp}}
+  {}
+  {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}}
+
+%
+%   重定义parencite命令，以满足标签带页码的国标要求
+%
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\parencite}%[\mkbibbrackets]
+  {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%]
+   \usebibmacro{prenote}}%
+  {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+   \usebibmacro{cite:comp}}
+  {}
+  {%[
+  \usebibmacro{cite:dump}]%
+   \mkbibsuperscript{\printfield{postnote}}}
+
+%
+%   新定义pagescite命令，以满足标签带页码的国标要求
+%
+%   原理方法:
+%   1.新增页码输出宏
+\newbibmacro*{postpages}{%
+  \iffieldundef{postnote}
+    {\printfield[postnote]{pages}}
+    {\printfield{postnote}}}
+%   2.新增\pagescite引用命令
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\pagescite}[\mkbibsuperscript]%\mkbibbrackets,仍然用上标
+  {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%]直接添加方括号
+   \usebibmacro{prenote}%
+   }
+  {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+   \usebibmacro{cite:comp}}
+  {}
+  {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]%
+   \usebibmacro{postpages}}
+
+%
+%   定义yearpagescite，为与ay样式兼容，等同于\pagescite
+%
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\yearpagescite}[\mkbibsuperscript]%\mkbibbrackets,仍然用上标
+  {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%]直接添加方括号
+   \usebibmacro{prenote}%
+   }
+  {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+   \usebibmacro{cite:comp}}
+  {}
+  {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]%
+   \usebibmacro{postpages}}
+
+%
+%   定义\yearcite命令，为与ay样式兼容，且提供不输出页码的标签格式，
+%
+%   原理方法:等同于\pagescite，但不要页码
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\yearcite}[\mkbibsuperscript]%\mkbibbrackets,仍然用上标
+  {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%]直接添加方括号
+   \usebibmacro{prenote}%
+   }
+  {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+   \usebibmacro{cite:comp}}
+  {}
+  {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]}
+
+%
+%   定义\authornumcite命令，输出作者信息，然后在后面带上顺序编码
+%   20180427，v1.0k，增加，hzz
+%   gb7714样式新定义的命令都把cite放到最后，比如前面的pagescite，yearcite，这里的\authornumcite
+%   区别于biblatex定义的命令都把cite放到前面，比如citeauthor等。
+%见numeric.CBX
+\newbibmacro*{cite}{%
+  \printtext[bibhyperref]{%
+    \printfield{labelprefix}%
+    \printfield{labelnumber}%
+    \ifbool{bbx:subentry}
+      {\printfield{entrysetcount}}
+      {}}}
+%见numeric.CBX，\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite},
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\authornumcite}%[\mkbibsuperscript]
+  {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+  {\iffieldequalstr{userf}{cn}{\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addthinspace}}%\addthinspace
+  {\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addspace}}%
+  \printnames{labelname}\mkbibsuperscript{\mkbibbrackets{\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+   \usebibmacro{cite}}}}
+  {\multicitedelim}
+  {\usebibmacro{postnote}}
+
+
+%textcite标注命令中的标点设置
+%\DeclareDelimFormat[textcite]{andothersdelim}{\addspace}%
+
+%textcite标注命令中的标点设置，注意只针对textcite命令。
+\DeclareDelimFormat[textcite]{nameyeardelim}{}%\addcomma\space
+\DeclareDelimFormat[textcite]{andothersdelim}{\iffieldequalstr{userf}{chinese}{\addthinspace}{\addspace}}%
+\AtEveryCitekey{%
+\iffieldequalstr{userf}{chinese}{\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addthinspace}}%\addthinspace
+  {\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addspace}}%
+}
+
+%
+%
+%
+\apptocmd{\refsection}{
+
+%\edef\gb@refsecnum{\number\c@refsection}
+\edef\gb@refsecnum{\number\c@refsection}%
+\ifcsundef{gb@aystyle@section\gb@refsecnum}%
+{}%
+{
+
+\renewcommand*{\iffinalcitedelim}{%
+  \ifnumequal{\value{textcitecount}}{\value{textcitetotal}-1}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:init}{%
+  \ifnumless{\value{multicitecount}}{2}
+    {\global\boolfalse{cbx:parens}%
+     \global\undef\cbx@lasthash
+     \global\undef\cbx@lastyear}
+    {\iffieldundef{prenote}
+       {}
+       {\global\undef\cbx@lasthash
+        \global\undef\cbx@lastyear}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:reinit}{%
+  \global\undef\cbx@lasthash
+  \global\undef\cbx@lastyear}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite}{%
+  \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+    {\ifthenelse{\ifnameundef{labelname}\OR\iffieldundef{labelyear}}
+       {\usebibmacro{cite:label}%
+        \setunit{\printdelim{nonameyeardelim}}%
+        \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}%
+        \usebibmacro{cite:reinit}}
+       {\iffieldequals{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}
+          {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}\AND
+                       \(\value{multicitecount}=0\OR\iffieldundef{postnote}\)}
+             {\setunit{\addcomma}%
+              \usebibmacro{cite:extradate}}
+             {\setunit{\compcitedelim}%
+              \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}%
+              \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}}
+          {\printnames{labelname}%
+           \setunit{\printdelim{nameyeardelim}}%
+           \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}%
+           \savefield{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}%
+           \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}}}
+    {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}%
+     \usebibmacro{cite:reinit}}%
+  \setunit{\multicitedelim}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{citeyear}{%
+  \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+    {\iffieldundef{labelyear}
+       {\usebibmacro{cite:label}%
+        \usebibmacro{cite:reinit}}
+       {\iffieldequals{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}
+          {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}\AND
+                       \(\value{multicitecount}=0\OR\iffieldundef{postnote}\)}
+             {\setunit{\addcomma}%
+              \usebibmacro{cite:extradate}}
+             {\setunit{\compcitedelim}%
+              \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}%
+              \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}}
+          {\usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}%
+           \savefield{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}%
+           \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}}}
+    {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}%
+     \usebibmacro{cite:reinit}}%
+  \setunit{\multicitedelim}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{textcite}{%
+  \iffieldequals{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}
+    {\iffieldundef{shorthand}
+       {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}\AND
+                    \(\value{multicitecount}=0\OR\iffieldundef{postnote}\)}
+          {\setunit{\addcomma}%
+           \usebibmacro{cite:extradate}}
+          {\setunit{\compcitedelim}%
+           \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}%
+           \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}}
+       {\setunit{\compcitedelim}%
+        \usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}%
+        \global\undef\cbx@lastyear}}
+    {\ifnameundef{labelname}
+       {\iffieldundef{shorthand}
+          {\usebibmacro{cite:label}%
+           \setunit{%
+             \global\booltrue{cbx:parens}%
+             \printdelim{nonameyeardelim}\bibopenparen}%
+           \ifnumequal{\value{citecount}}{1}
+             {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+             {}%
+           \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}}
+          {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}
+       {\printnames{labelname}%
+        \setunit{%
+          \global\booltrue{cbx:parens}%
+          \printdelim{nameyeardelim}\bibopenparen}%
+        \ifnumequal{\value{citecount}}{1}
+          {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
+          {}%
+        \iffieldundef{shorthand}
+          {\iffieldundef{labelyear}
+             {\usebibmacro{cite:label}}
+             {\usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}}%
+           \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}
+          {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}%
+           \global\undef\cbx@lastyear}}%
+     \stepcounter{textcitecount}%
+     \savefield{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}}%
+  \setunit{%
+    \ifbool{cbx:parens}
+      {\bibcloseparen\global\boolfalse{cbx:parens}}
+      {}%
+    \textcitedelim}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:shorthand}{%
+  \printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{shorthand}}}
+
+%
+%   重定义cite:label，针对biblatex3.8以上版本set条目集的标注(引用)标签
+%
+%   原理方法:当条目是set时，v3.8以上版本，都没有有用的信息(区别于3.7以下版本set复制第一个成员的信息)，
+%   于是利用entrykey来给出标签，那么就要set的条目关键字是需要的字符串，注意字符串中间不能有空格
+\renewbibmacro*{cite:label}{%
+  \iffieldundef{label}%
+    {\iffieldundef{labeltitle}{\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{entrykey}}}%entrykey
+    {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield[citetitle]{labeltitle}}}}%
+    {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{label}}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:labeldate+extradate}{%
+  \iffieldundef{labelyear}
+    {}
+    {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printlabeldateextra}}}
+
+\newbibmacro*{cite:extradate}{%
+  \iffieldundef{extradate}
+    {}
+    {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{extradate}}}}
+
+
+
+%
+%   重定义cite:label，针对biblatex3.8以上版本set条目集的标注(引用)标签
+%
+%   原理方法:当条目是set时，v3.8以上版本，都没有有用的信息(区别于3.7以下版本set复制第一个成员的信息)，
+%   于是利用entrykey来给出标签，那么就要set的条目关键字是需要的字符串，注意字符串中间不能有空格
+\renewbibmacro*{cite:label}{%
+  \iffieldundef{label}%
+    {\iffieldundef{labeltitle}{\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{entrykey}}}%entrykey
+    {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield[citetitle]{labeltitle}}}}%
+    {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{label}}}}
+
+%
+%   重定义cite命令
+%
+%   方法:\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkbibparens]{precode}{loopcode}{sepcode}{postcode}
+%    v1.0p版后将cite的处理方式修改为类似pagescite，而不再使用biblatex的标准方式
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}
+  {\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
+  \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{%
+  \iffieldundef{postnote}%
+    {}%
+    {\thefield{postnote}}}%
+    (\usebibmacro{prenote}}%)
+  {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+   \usebibmacro{cite}}
+  {}
+  {%(
+  )\mkbibsuperscript{\usebibmacro{postnote}}%\usebibmacro{postnote}
+  }
+
+\DeclareCiteCommand{\parencite}[\mkbibparens]
+  {\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
+   \usebibmacro{prenote}}
+  {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
+   \usebibmacro{cite}}
+  {}
+  {\usebibmacro{postnote}}
+
+
+
+
+}
+}{}{}